JP2020114406A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game board 224 has a through gate 35A. When game balls enter the through gate 35A, the game balls enter a specific accessory 33. At the time, the game balls enter a second special winning hole 253, and reservation information on a second special pattern side is acquired based on the ball entry. The reservation information on the second special pattern side can be stored until a number of the reservation information reaches a prescribed number. In a pachinko machine 10, means for counting the number of game balls entered the specific accessory 33 is provided. When the number of game balls entered the specific accessory 33 reaches a specific number, the game balls enter the first special winning hole 52, and based on the ball entry, reservation information on a first special pattern side is acquired.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is carried out based on the fact that a game ball launched by a player operating a launching device or the like has entered a ball entry portion provided in the game area, and a display device is also provided. The variable display of the pattern is displayed on the display screen of, and when the winning result is obtained in the lottery, the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the special game state advantageous for the player There is known a configuration that shifts to (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175).

JP, 2005-074175, A

In such a gaming machine, the lottery for transitioning to the special game state based on the entry of the game ball into the above-mentioned ball entering section is performed with a predetermined probability every time the entry of the ball entering section occurs. There is. If more balls enter the ball entry section while this lottery or variable display corresponding to this lottery is being performed, that information is stored in a predetermined number of times, and then lottery or A configuration in which variable display is performed is common. Therefore, if the specified number of pieces of information corresponding to the above-mentioned entry is already stored, even if the entry to the entry part occurs, the player cannot receive the lottery for transitioning to the special game state, This may cause disadvantages and eventually lead to a decline in the entertainment of the game. Therefore, there is still room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

The present invention is
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area when operated by the player,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball that is launched by the launching means and flows down a game area can enter.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a game ball enters the ball entering portion,
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number set in advance as an upper limit,
For each of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, it is sequentially determined whether or not it is a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting the first privilege to the player, and the determination result is the grant corresponding. A privilege granting means for granting the first privilege when the result is obtained,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first process can be executed when the number of game balls entering the ball entering part is the first number, and the first process when the second number is larger than the first number. Is a configuration capable of executing different second processing,
By operating the launching means in a specific mode in which it is possible to enter the ball entering portion regardless of the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the first privilege different from the first privilege can be obtained. 2 means capable of executing a first notification that the situation is such that a privilege can be granted,
When a ball is thrown into the ball entering portion due to the operation of the firing means in the specific mode, it is more likely that the operation does not continue than the case where the operation of the firing means in the specific mode is continued. Means for executing a second notification that the situation may be advantageous;
Equipped with
The first notification and the second notification are performed by a common notification unit.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. (A) It is a schematic diagram of the operating port in the closed state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the operating port in the open state. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a special accessory. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success/failure table for special drawings, (b)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for special drawings. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the variable display time table for special figures, (c)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the variable display time table for general figures. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the general/universal figure distribution table which is referred at the time of low frequency support mode, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the general/universal pattern distribution table for reference at the time of high frequency support mode. is there. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure normal electric power control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information on the universal figure side. It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation|variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during change in the universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows processing during finalization of a universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows special map special electric power control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending information on the special figure side. It is a flow chart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows special electric power end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the production determination processing performed by the sound and light control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) production pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows production replacement processing. It is a flowchart showing a symbol replacement process by timing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between a general drawing and a special drawing. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information by the side of a universal figure in a 2nd embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation|variation start process, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation display time table for universal figures at the time of a ceiling. It is a flow chart which shows processing during change in the universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition information setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows production decision processing. It is a flow chart which shows production replacement processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between a general drawing and a special drawing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used in a win/loss lottery or the like in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information on the universal figure side. (A) It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation|variation start process, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation display time table for universal figures at the time of a ceiling. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition information setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows production decision processing. It is a front view which shows the structure of the (a) game board in 4th Embodiment, (b) It is the schematic of the through gate in the case of a guidance state, (c) The through gate in the case of a non-guidance state. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the hit/miss table for special drawings, (b), (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for special drawings. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the general/universal figure distribution table which is referred at the time of low frequency support mode, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the general/universal pattern distribution table for reference at the time of high frequency support mode. is there. (A) It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information by the side of a general figure, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a reservation display lottery table. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation|variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending information on the special figure side. It is a flow chart which shows special electric power end processing. It is the flowchart which shows production decision processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between a general drawing and a special drawing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the game. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the continuous holiday house which can be expected after that in the situation where the required number of passages to a ceiling differs. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the acquisition process of the reservation information by the side of a general figure. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of acquisition information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the acquisition process of the reservation information by the side of a general figure.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main components of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a plurality of frame members on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the island frame of the game hall may be equipped with the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in front view.

In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area PE, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the guiding means. The guide rail as is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 mounted below the window 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 66a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or the firing handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotationally operated, the solenoid 27c is drive-controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In each opening, there are a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a special accessory 33, an operating opening 34, through gates 35A and 35B, a variable display unit 36, a lottery result display portion 37 for displaying various lottery results, and the like. Each is provided. The lottery result display section 37 is provided with a special figure display section 38 as a main display section and a general figure display section 39 as a character display section. A plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided.

Even if the ball enters the through gates 35A and 35B, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the special accessory 33, and the operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when a ball enters the special accessory 33 and a ball enters the operation opening 34, three prize balls are paid out, and a general prize is awarded. When a ball enters the mouth 31 and a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, 10 prize balls are paid out.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls may be different, for example, the number of prize balls associated with the actuation port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls associated with the special accessory 33. The configuration may be the same as or more than at least one of the general winning opening 31 and the special electric winning device 32. Further, the number of prize balls applied to the special electric winning device 32 may be larger than the number of other prize balls.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode that is not discharged. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the game ball entering the outlet 24a, the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the special character 33, the working opening 34, and the through gates 35A and 35B. The entry of the game ball is also referred to as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protruding toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game balls shot in the game area PE can flow is defined. Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and a lower continuous area of the upper area PE1 with respect to the upper area PE1 which is lower than the variable display unit 36. The left side area PE2, which is the left side area, and the right side area PE3, which is an area that is continuous below the upper side area PE1 and is on the right side of the variable display unit 36, and the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, respectively. On the other hand, a lower region PE4 that is a region below the variable display unit 36 that is continuous below it is partitioned.

As the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount within a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is left in the upper area PE1 to the left of the lateral center position. Let it flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PE1, the left area PE2, and the lower area PE4. On the other hand, the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the second range of rotation amount that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, so that the player is operating to the right of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PE1, the right area PE3, and the lower area PE4. That is, the player can play the game ball by flowing down the left side area PE2 of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 by adjusting the turning operation amount of the firing operation device 28, and the right side area. The game can be played so that the game ball flows down the PE3.

The special accessory 33 is a winning device having two winning openings (a special winning opening 52 and a general winning opening 53) inside thereof, and is installed from the left side area PE2 to the lower area PE4. The special accessory 33 has a long passage case 33b provided in a state of protruding to the front side of the board surface of the game board 24, and a game ball flowing down the game area PE at the upper end of the passage case 33b. Is provided with a ball passage port 33a through which a game ball passage region R is formed below the ball passage port 33a. The ball passage opening 33a constitutes an entrance portion of the special accessory 33, and is provided in the left area PE2. The ball passage opening 33a is opened upward, and no member for opening and closing is provided. Then, in a situation where the game balls are fired in the same manner, the passing frequency of the ball passing port 33a (also the passing probability of the through gate 35A) is constant irrespective of the game state. The passage case 33b is covered with a cover member 60 formed of a non-transparent material on the front side of the gaming machine, and a winning port, a guide member and the like, which will be described later, provided on the passage case 33b are located in front of the pachinko machine 10. It is not visible.

The working port 34 is installed in the right side area PE3. In other words, the actuation opening 34 cannot be won when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, and the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. When is operated, winning is possible.

The structure of the working port 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A and 4B are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the working port 34. The working port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The general electric accessory 34a is connected to a general electric drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the general electric drive unit 34b to be in the closed state shown in FIG. 4(a). It is arranged in either the (non-support state or non-guide state) and the open state (support state or guide state) shown in FIG. In the closed state of the universal electric part 34a, the game ball cannot enter the operating port 34, and when the general electric item 34a is in the open state, the winning of the operating port 34 is possible. By the way, when it is in the open state, the universal electric accessory 34a projects toward the game area PE, and guides the winning of the working opening 34. The operating port 34 is provided with a detection sensor 34c, and the detection sensor 34c detects a game ball that has won the operating port 34.

It should be noted that the general electric accessory 34a is switched between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the operating port 34 and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur than a state in which the prize is not likely to occur but the prize is more likely to occur. It may be configured. Further, it may be configured to switch between a state in which a prize is more likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur by moving or rotating the general electric accessory 34a in the front-rear direction. Further, it may be configured such that the ordinary electric accessory 34a is not provided, and switching between a state in which a prize is more likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the operating port 34 itself.

The left through gate 35A of the left and right through gates 35A and 35B is provided directly above the ball passage opening 33a in the left area PE2, and the right through gate 35B is provided in the right area PE3 of the operating opening 34a. It is provided at a predetermined interval above. In this case, when the firing operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, the game ball can be won into the through gate 35A, and the right side area PE3 is shot so that the game ball flows down. When the operation device 28 is operated, the game ball can be won in the through gate 35B. The through gates 35A and 35B have a ball passage hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game balls that have won the through gates 35A and 35B flow directly below. As a result, all the game balls that have won the through gate 35A in the left side area PE2 are introduced into the special accessory 33 through the ball passage opening 33a. In addition, the game ball that wins the through gate 35B in the right side area PE3 wins the working opening 34 according to the subsequent ball movement and the state of the working opening 34 (state of opening/closing the accessory). A detection sensor 35c is provided on each of the through gates 35A and 35B, and the detection sensor 35c detects a game ball that has won the through gates 35A and 35B.

The universal electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B as a trigger, and the lottery result display portion 37 provided in the lower left corner of the game area PE where the game ball does not pass is normally used. A variable display of the pattern is displayed on the diagram display unit 39. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the support win, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is ended, the mode is shifted to the support execution mode. In the support execution mode, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The general-purpose display unit 39 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light-emitting units are arranged in a predetermined mode, but is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT is provided. Alternatively, it may be configured by another type of display device such as a dot matrix display. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the public figure display unit 39, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserves when the game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B is 0. Therefore, the pending display section corresponding to these is not provided.

However, for example, one or a plurality of withdrawals may be allowed to be held for the prizes to the through gates 35A, 35B. It is advisable to provide a universal figure hold display section. For example, the maximum number of game balls that win the through gates 35A and 35B may be reserved up to 4, and the reserved number may be displayed by lighting the universal figure reservation display section.

A big hit lottery is carried out with the winning of the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through a display effect on the special drawing display portion 38 of the lottery result display portion 37 and the symbol display device 42 of the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure display section 38 is provided with a first special figure display section 38a and a second special figure display section 38b. In the first special figure display portion 38a, the jackpot lottery is performed with the winning of the special winning opening 52 as a trigger, and thereby variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display portion 38b, the jackpot lottery is performed with the winning of the operation opening 34 as a trigger, and thereby variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

In addition, the first special figure display portion 38a and the second special figure display portion 38b are configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix display device, or another type of display device. Further, as the patterns displayed on the first special figure display portion 38a and the second special figure display portion 38b, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed, or the like can be considered.

In detail about the symbol display device 42, the symbol display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 42 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the symbol display device 42, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed on the first special symbol display portion 38a based on the winning of the special winning opening 52, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. When the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display portion 38b based on the winning of the operation opening 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed accordingly. In addition, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed on the universal figure display unit 39 based on the winning to the through gates 35A and 35B, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is correspondingly displayed on the symbol display device 42. Done.

Display contents when the variable display of the symbols is performed on the symbol display device 42 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42.

The design, which is a type of design, is composed of nine types of main designs, each of which is provided with the numbers "1" to "9", and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped design. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by adding numbers "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, 9 types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen 42a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It is like this. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display screen 42a. ..

When the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 42a based on the winning of the through gates 35A, 35B, the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52, the symbols in the respective symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically arranged in a predetermined direction. The variable display is started as if scrolling to. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the state ends with the predetermined symbols still displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In addition, when the variable display of the symbol ends, when it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode described later, or when it corresponds to the transition to the support execution mode described later, on any of the activated lines. The same combination of symbols is formed.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of any of the through gates 35A, 35B, the working opening 34, and the special winning opening 52, it is displayed on any of the special figure display parts 38a, 38b, the general figure display part 39, and the symbol display device 42. Is started, and a predetermined result is displayed and ended until one game is played. In addition, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 42 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 42 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

In the present embodiment, the number of holdings when the game ball wins the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 is one each. However, a hold display section corresponding to these is not provided. This is a device for making it difficult to recognize which game play is based on winning through the through gates 35A, 35B, the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

However, for example, a plurality of payouts may be held for the winnings to the working opening 34 and the special payout opening 52. A special figure reservation display section may be provided. For example, it is preferable that the maximum number of game balls that have won in the operation opening 34 and the special winning opening 52 be held at a maximum of 4, and that the number of held pieces be displayed by turning on each special figure hold display section.

When the jackpot lottery based on the winnings to the working opening 34 and the special winning opening 52 is won, the process shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Here, when the game ball passes through the ball passing port 33a and the game ball is introduced into the special accessory 33, every time the ball passes through the ball passing port 33a, all the game balls enter the special winning opening 52. That is not the case (that is, the jackpot lottery is not executed every time), but the game balls are won in the special winning opening 52 at a frequency of passing a predetermined number of balls, and the jackpot lottery is executed with the winning. ..

The special electric winning device 32 is provided below the operating port 34 in the right area PE3. In other words, the special electric prize winning device 32 cannot win the prize when the launch operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, and the launch operating device is set so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. When 28 is operated, winning is possible.

The special accessory 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the special accessory 33. 6B to 6E are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the special accessory 33. 6B to 6E show a configuration in which the special accessory 33 is simplified in order to facilitate the description of the operation of the special accessory 33.

As shown in FIG. 6A, in the special accessory 33, the passage case 33b is formed with a ball passage opening 33a having a size through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball passed through the ball passage opening 33a. A game ball passage area R in which the water flows down is formed. In the game ball passage region R, an internal passage 51 is formed by a pair of enclosure walls 33c (upper and lower enclosure walls 33c) of the passage case 33b and a protrusion 33d provided therebetween. The internal passage 51 is a passage for guiding a game ball that has passed through the ball passage port 33a to one of the special winning port 52 and the general winning port 53, and the special winning port 52 and the general winning port from the ball passing port 33a. It is formed over the mouth 53.

When the game ball wins the special winning opening 52, the jackpot lottery is carried out, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening 53, the jackpot lottery is not carried out. It should be noted that prize balls are provided when a game ball is won in either the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53, and in the present embodiment, there are three prize balls. The special winning opening 52 is provided with a detection sensor 52a for the special winning opening, and the general winning opening 53 is provided with a detection sensor 53a for the general winning opening. Both detection sensors 52a and 53a detect which winning opening the game ball has won.

The special accessory 33 shifts to a state in which a game ball is won in the special winning opening 52 as a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passage opening 33a. Specifically, the special accessory 33 is provided with a plurality of distribution plates 54 from the upstream side to the downstream side in the internal passage 51, and each of the distribution plates 54 has passed through the ball passage port 33a. Based on the arrival of the game ball, the distribution destination of the game ball in the game ball passage area R is changed. That is, each distribution plate 54 is rotatably supported in both forward and reverse directions by a rotation shaft 55 provided at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and rotates about the rotation shaft 55. It can be said that each distribution plate 54 is an oscillating body that oscillates when a game ball hits. In this case, each distribution plate 54 has the first passage 51a side (lower right direction in the figure) in which the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 52 every time the game ball flows down from the upstream side in the internal passage 51. ) And the second passage 51b side (lower left direction in the drawing) in which the special winning opening 52 cannot be won, respectively. In this embodiment, eight distribution plates 54 are provided.

These eight distribution plates 54 are arranged so that when the game balls are distributed to the first passage 51a side by the distribution plate 54 in the previous stage, the game balls reach the distribution plate 54 in the subsequent stage. When the number of game balls passing through the ball passing port 33a reaches a predetermined number, the distribution destinations of the game balls for the eight distribution plates 54 are all on the first passage 51a side, and the game balls are the special winning openings 52. It is designed to move to the state of winning.

In each distribution plate 54, the lower part of the upper part and the lower part with the rotating shaft 55 sandwiched therebetween is a thick taper portion 56, and the width of the internal passage 51 is reduced by the taper portion 56. It is narrowed. In this case, when the game ball passes through the internal passage 51, the game ball comes into contact with the tapered portion 56 of the distribution plate 54, whereby the distribution plate 54 can be rotated. The distribution plate 54 rotated by the contact with the game ball guides the next passing game ball in a direction different from that of the game ball that has just passed. Specifically, if the distribution destination of the game ball is the first passage 51a, each distribution plate 54 switches the distribution destination to the second passage 51b with the arrival of the next game ball, and vice versa. If the distribution destination of the game ball is the second passage 51b, the distribution destination is switched to the first passage 51a with the arrival of the next game ball.

A magnet 57 is provided on the upper side of the distribution plate 54 with the rotating shaft 55 interposed therebetween. In addition, a passage-side magnet 58 is provided on the inner side surface of the special accessory 33 at a position on the distribution plate 54 side where the magnet 57 rotates and above the rotation shaft 55. Both magnets 57 and 58 are provided so as to have polarities that repel each other. By the repulsive force by the magnets 57 and 58 acting, the magnet 57 on the distribution plate 54 side is arranged on the right side or the left side of the passage side magnet 58 in the natural state, and the game ball is placed in the first passage 51a and the first passage 51a. It is distributed to one of the two passages 51b.

The magnets 57 and 58 serve as position holding means for holding the distribution plate 54 at either a predetermined position that is downward to the right or a predetermined position that is downward to the left when the distribution plate 54 is rotated. Function. When the game ball hits the tapered portion 56 of the distribution plate 54, the magnet 57 on the distribution plate 54 side passes in front of the magnet 58 on the passage side and moves to the opposite side in the left-right direction. Here, the rotation shaft 55 of the distribution plate 54 extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 and is connected to a rotation restricting portion (not shown) at a position on the inner side of the internal passage 51. The rotation restricting portion restricts the rotation range of the distribution plate 54, so that the distribution plate 54 does not rotate more than necessary.

Eight distribution plates 54 are continuously provided from the ball passage opening 33a to the respective winning openings 52 and 53, and there are 256 combinations of the states of the distribution plates 54, that is, the combinations of distribution destinations. (=2 to the 8th power). Every time the game ball flows down the internal passage 51, the state of the eight distribution plates 54 changes, and 256 combinations of states are sequentially switched. In the internal passage 51, the flow-down path is different for each of the 256 combinations of the distribution plates 54, and the game ball is guided from the ball passage opening 33a to the special winning opening 52 by one combination thereof. Specifically, when all the distribution plates 54 are in a state of distributing the game balls to the first passage 51a side (the lower right direction), the game balls flowing down the internal passage 51 enter the special winning opening 52. To do. All game balls that pass through other routes win the general winning opening 53.

By providing each distribution plate 54 as described above, it becomes possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a ceiling function. Here, the ceiling function is a function in which a privilege is given to a player by performing a predetermined game a predetermined number of times, and the number of predetermined games to be executed before the privilege is given is called a ceiling. In the present embodiment, if the prize can be generated 256 times in the ball passage opening 33a, the ceiling will be reached, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be shifted to the open/close execution mode with a probability of almost 100%.

In the internal passage 51, the game balls distributed to the second passage 51b side (lower left direction) by the distribution plates 54 reach the general winning opening 53 without passing through any distribution plate 54 thereafter. Becomes At this time, since the player does not pass through the distribution plate 54 on the downstream side, the player gets the prize ball earlier than when the player reaches the special winning opening 52. Here, if a time difference (time lag) occurs between the case where the game ball is won at the special winning opening 52 and the case where the game ball is won at the general winning opening 53, the ball passing through the ball passing opening 33a is caused and the prize ball is won. By measuring the time up to, it becomes possible for the player to predict whether or not there is a winning in the special winning opening 52. In order to make this prediction difficult, a ball contact portion 51c against which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side hits is provided on the second passage 51b side. When the game ball collides with the ball contact portion 51c, the downward guidance of the game ball becomes temporarily gentle. This makes it possible to prevent a time lag from occurring between the ball passing through the ball passing port 33a and the prize ball when the ball does not pass through one of the distribution plates 54.

Next, the game ball distribution operation in the special accessory 33 will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. Here, for ease of understanding, a configuration using only two distribution plates 54 will be described. In this way, in the configuration in which the two distribution plates 54 are provided, there are four combinations (=2 squared combinations) of the distribution plates 54, and each four game balls have passed through the ball passage port 33a. The player will be guided to the special winning opening 52.

In FIG. 6B, as an initial state, each distribution plate 54 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the lower left (the second passage 51b side). In this state, when the first game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower left (the second passage 51b side) by the distribution plate 54 on the upper side and the general prize hole 53 is won. .. By the passage of the first game ball, the distribution destination of the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side is switched, and the special accessory 33 is in the state shown in FIG. 6C.

Next, when the second game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower right (the first passage 51a side) by the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side and the distribution on the lower stage side. It is distributed to the lower left (on the side of the second passage 51b) by the plate 54, and wins at the general winning opening 53. By the passage of the second game ball, the distribution destinations of the distribution plates 54 on both upper and lower stages are switched, and the special accessory 33 is in the state of FIG. 6(d).

Next, when the third game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower left (the second passage 51b side) by the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side and the general winning opening 53 is won. .. By the passage of the third game ball, the distribution destination of the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side is switched, and the special accessory 33 is in the state shown in FIG. 6(e).

Next, when the fourth game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower right (the first passage 51a side) by the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side and the distribution on the lower stage side. It is distributed to the lower right (first passage 51a side) by the plate 54 and the special winning opening 52 is won. By the passage of the fourth game ball, the distribution destinations of the distribution plates 54 on both upper and lower stages are switched, and the special accessory 33 returns to the state of FIG. 6(e). Similarly, as the game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, each distribution plate 54 repeats the operation of FIG. 6(b)→(c)→(d)→(e). Therefore, it is possible to win a game ball into the special winning opening 52 for each predetermined number of passing balls.

In the special accessory 33 of the present embodiment, the distribution plates 54 are provided in the upper and lower stages, so that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 52 every time the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a 256 times. , The number of times can be changed arbitrarily. For example, if only one distribution plate 54 is provided, a prize is given to the special winning opening 52 every time the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a twice. Further, if the distribution plates 54 are provided in the upper and lower six stages, a prize is given to the special winning opening 52 every time the game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a 64 times, and the distribution plates 54 are provided in the upper and lower seven stages. For example, every time the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a 128 times, a prize is given to the special winning opening 52.

Here, in order to realize the ceiling function in the pachinko machine 10, it is desirable that the winning probability of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball is won in the special winning opening 52 is almost 100%. Thereby, when the game ball is repeatedly introduced into the special accessory 33, the jackpot winning is executed every predetermined number of times (256 times in this embodiment) of the game.

Next, the special electric prize winning device 32 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 has a large winning opening 32a having a size through which a game ball can pass, and the game ball cannot pass through the large winning hole 32a. An opening/closing member 32b on the special electric power side is provided for switching to an open state in which a ball can pass. The special-electricity-side opening/closing member 32b is opened by being driven by a special-electrical drive unit 32c through a link mechanism (not shown). In addition, the special electric prize winning device 32 is formed with a prize passing portion at a position where a game ball won in the special electric prize winning device 32 is surely passed through the special winning opening 32a, and the position of the prize passing portion is further formed. The detection sensor 32e for the special winning opening is provided such that the detection area exists in the. By the detection sensor 32e for the special winning opening, the game balls that have won the special electric winning device 32 are individually detected.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area PE to be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PE is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various light emitting portions are provided. A display light emitting portion 63 is provided to the right of the window portion 61 as a part of various light emitting portions. An error light emitting section 64 is provided above the window section 61. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 that outputs a sound effect according to the game state is provided.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulge portion 66 and a lower bulge portion 67 that bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 66a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device to be described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 67a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 66a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main controller 71 that controls the main controls of the game is mounted. The main controller 71 has a main control board housed in a board box.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 66a or the lower plate 67a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply.

The control device gathering unit 74 generates and outputs a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and accompanies the player's operation of the firing operation device 28. It is provided with a power supply and a launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/firing control device 78 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal board 79 in addition to the payout mechanism section 73 and the control device assembly unit 74. The external terminal board 79 is installed on the back corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and in the upper corner portion. The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer in the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. 7.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitoring board (power interruption monitoring board) 85 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. A ROM 83 and a RAM 84 are built in the MPU 82.

The ROM 83 is configured to use a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage as a read-only memory. The ROM 83 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data.

The RAM 84 is configured to use a memory, such as SRAM or DRAM, that requires external power supply for storage to be used for both reading and writing, is random accessible, and has the same data capacity when compared. The time required for reading is shorter than that for the ROM 83. The RAM 84 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 83.

In addition to the above elements, the MPU 82 or the main control board 81 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be configured into an individual chip. The same applies to other control devices.

The MPU 82 has an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, various detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a, etc. are connected to the input side of the MPU 82. A power supply and a firing control device 78 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 85, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring board 85. Further, based on the detection results of the various detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a, the MPU 82 makes a prize determination (ball determination) to each winning portion. In addition, the MPU 82 executes the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 or the working opening 34, and the support lottery based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B.

A power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and a sound/light control device 300 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. To the payout control device 77, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the winning determination to the winning portion. Various commands such as a variation command, a classification command, a final stop command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound and light control device 300. Details of these various commands will be described later.

Further, the output side of the MPU 82 is connected to a drive unit 32c for special electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing member 32b of the special prize winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for ordinary electricity that opens and closes the universal utility object 34a of the operating port 34. Further, the lottery result display section 37 including the first special figure display section 38a, the second special figure display section 38b, and the general figure display section 39 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 81, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

An external terminal board 79 is connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The external terminal board 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals). For example, eight external terminals are provided, and the types of information output to the management computer to the outside are different. A terminal for externally outputting an opening/closing execution signal indicating that it is in the opening/closing execution mode and a terminal for externally outputting a support execution signal indicating that it is in the support execution mode are connected to the plurality of external terminals. And a terminal for externally outputting a high-frequency signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being performed. The MPU 82 sets information according to the progress of the game in the external output buffer provided in the RAM 84. Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer, the setting for signal output is made to the external terminal board 79, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the management computer in the game hall. Each external terminal is configured by using a photocoupler in order to enable transmission of an electric signal from the main control device 71 to the management computer and prevent the reverse flow.

The power failure monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and also monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls or loan balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

The power supply and firing control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power necessary for each of the main control board 81 and the payout control device 77 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. By the way, the power supply and firing control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and drives the game ball launch mechanism 27 based on the fact that a predetermined launch operation for the launch operation device 28 is specified.

The MPU 302 is mounted on the sound/light control board 301 provided in the sound/light control device 300. The MPU 302 includes a ROM 303 in which various control programs executed by the MPU 302 and fixed value data are stored, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 303. A certain RAM 304, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are built in.

The MPU 302 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 63, the error light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 provided on the front door frame 14 based on the command received from the main control unit 71. Further, these commands are transmitted as they are or the corresponding commands after analysis are transmitted to the display control device 400. Incidentally, the sound and light control device 300 is electrically connected to the display control device 400 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 400 includes a display control board 401 on which a MPU 402, which is an element in which a program ROM 403 and a work RAM 404 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 405, a character ROM 406, and a video RAM 407 are mounted. Equipped with.

The MPU 402 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 71 via the sound/light control device 300 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 405 (specifically, an internal command for the VDP 405). Is generated).

The program ROM 403 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 402 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG image data for a background image. The work RAM 404 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 402 executes various programs.

The VDP 405 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 405 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 405 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 402, the video RAM 407 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 407 from the character ROM 406 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 42.

The character ROM 406 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a design displayed on the design display device 42. The character ROM 406 holds bit map format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like. These image data, tables, etc. are stored in the character ROM 406.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 406 and share the character ROMs 406 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 403 may be stored in the character ROM 406.

The video RAM 407 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 42, and the display content of the symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 407.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in MPU82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various kinds of lottery in the MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 82 uses various counter information to perform a jackpot lottery, an open lottery for the utility electrician 34a, a display setting of the first special figure display portion 38a and a second special figure display portion 38b, and a symbol display of the symbol display device 42. Settings, display settings of the public figure display unit 39, and the like are performed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, the support type counter C2 used for the lottery for the type of the support mode set after the opening/closing execution mode, and the winning of the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52. 1st reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 42 fluctuates due to deviation, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and each special figure display section 38a, 38b and the first variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time (operation duration time or special figure variation time) on the symbol display device 42, and a support lottery for whether or not to open the general electric officer 34a , A second reach random number counter C5 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 42 is displaced and changed based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, and the universal figure display portion 39. The second fluctuation type counter CS2 for determining the fluctuation display time (operation continuation time or general figure fluctuation time) in FIG. The counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS1 to CS2 are provided in the lottery counter area 101 of the RAM 84.

Each of the counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS1 to CS2 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals.

Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, and the first reach random number counter C3 are provided as an obtained information storage means for jackpot lottery when a winning in the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 occurs. It is stored in the special figure reservation area 102. The special figure reservation area 102 includes a first special figure reservation area 103, a second special figure reservation area 104, and a special figure execution area 105.

Each of the first special figure reservation area 103 and the second special figure reservation area 104 is provided with one area in which reservation storage is possible. Then, in the situation where neither the game reproduction effect nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the reservation information is not acquired in the first special figure reservation area 103, the winning of the special winning opening 52 occurs. By doing so, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, and the first reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special figure holding area 103 as the special figure holding information, and the second special figure holding area 104 is stored. When the winning is generated in the operating port 34 in a situation where the holding information is not acquired in the, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, and the first reach random number counter C3 is used as the holding information on the special drawing side. , And is stored in the second special drawing reservation area 104.

In the special figure execution area 105, when the variable display is started in any of the special figure display parts 38a and 38b, the pending information of the target for the special figure right/wrong determination or the distribution determination is stored. Area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display portion 38a is started, the reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 103 is moved to the special figure execution area 105. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display portion 38b is started, the reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 104 is moved to the special figure execution area 105.

On the other hand, the ordinary figure holding area 106 provided as the acquisition information storage means for the support lottery does not have an area in which it can be held and stored, and when starting the variable display on the ordinary figure display portion 39. In addition, there is provided only a general-purpose execution area 107 as an area for storing the pending information for the support determination. Therefore, the various numerical value information of the ordinary electric random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5, and the second variation type counter CS2 are directly stored in the execution area 107 for general figures when a prize is awarded to the through gates 35A and 35B. It is stored and the support judgment is started. That is, various numerical value information for the support lottery is stored only when a prize is placed in the through gates 35A and 35B in a situation where the holding information is not stored in the execution area 107 for the general figure, and the execution area for the general figure is stored. Even if a prize is awarded to the through gates 35A and 35B while the hold information is stored in 107, the various numerical information for the support lottery is not held.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and, as already described, is stored in the special figure reservation area 102 at the timing when the game ball wins the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

The value of the random number for the big hit is stored as a big hit win table in the win table storage area as a win information group storage means in the ROM 83. The jackpot table for big hits is set with a hit/loss table for a common special drawing that is used when the holding information acquired based on the winning of the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 is judged.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the jackpot result and the out-of-match result are set as the hit/miss results by referring to the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot result is the result of shifting the game state to the open/close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened/closed.

The opening/closing execution mode is executed with a predetermined number of round games as the upper limit. Round game, either one of the condition that the predetermined opening duration for special electric power elapses and that the predetermined maximum number of game balls for special electric power wins the special winning opening 32a. It is a game that continues until it is played. In the pachinko machine 10, as the open/close execution mode, there is only one in which the upper limit number of round games is set to 2 rounds, but a plurality of open/close execution modes are set so that the upper limit number of round games is different. It may have been done.

The open duration of each round game is the same, and the open duration is 29.5 seconds which is the upper limit winning response time which is equal to or more than the product of the game cycle of the game ball and the upper limit of the number of winnings. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is continuously operated by the player, one game ball is launched toward the game area PE in 0.6 sec. The mechanism 27 is drive-controlled. Also, the upper limit number of winnings in the round game is set to 10. Then, in each round game, the opening continuation time that is equal to or more than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of the corresponding round game is set, and the firing operation is performed in a mode aiming at winning the special electric prize winning device 32. If is continued, the maximum number of winnings to the special winning opening 32a will occur in each round game.

The open duration of each round game is arbitrary as long as the maximum number of round games can be won. Further, the opening durations may differ between round games, in which case the opening durations may differ greatly between round games, and they are set to be substantially the same so that they look the same. Good.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the hit/miss table for special figures has a jackpot result and a miss result as hit/miss results. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot result is set to 599, and the probability of a jackpot result is 599/600 by referring to the hit/miss table for special figures. However, the probability is not limited to this, and the probability may be set lower than the above.

Next, the support type counter C2 will be described.

The support type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 27, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The support type counter C2 is regularly updated and, as already described, is stored in the special figure holding area 102 at the timing when the game ball wins the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

The support type counter C2 is used to determine the support mode of the general electric accessory 34a of the operation port 34 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode, when compared in a situation in which the game balls are continuously emitted to the game area PE in the same manner, the general electric utility object 34a is opened per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high or low.

Here, first, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 will be briefly described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35A always enters the special accessory 33. Then, the game ball that entered the 256th time is won in the special winning opening 52. Based on the winning of the special winning opening 52, the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired, and almost 100% of the jackpot results are jackpot results. When the jackpot result is reached, the special electric winning device 32 shifts to an open/close execution mode in which the player is in an open state, and the player can obtain a prize ball by winning a game ball into the special winning opening 32a of the special electric winning device 32. .. Further, the opening/closing execution mode can be shifted by a winning/winning lottery based on a winning of the operating opening 34. As described above, the winning of the working port 34 is permitted by opening the universal electric accessory 34a.

The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is used for the lottery to decide whether or not to open the ordinary electric accessory 34a. Further, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are different in the probability of being a support win (the general electric utility article 34a is in the open state) in the support lottery using the general electric random number counter C4, and the low frequency support is performed. In the mode, the winning probability is lower than in the high-frequency support mode. When the support win is reached, in any of the support modes, one opening for 5 seconds longer than the firing cycle of the game ball is performed. That is, in any of the support modes, winning the support win allows the winning of the operation opening 34, and makes it possible to shift to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is set lower than that in the high-frequency support mode, so that the low-frequency support mode is less likely to win the operating port 34 than the high-frequency support mode. Further, when the player wins the through-gate 35A rather than the through-gate 35B, prize balls (three in the present embodiment) are paid out based on the subsequent winning of the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53, and further special Since the distribution plate 54 in the accessory 33 is switched to win the special winning opening 52 at the 256th time, there is a merit that the winning through the through gate 35A brings it closer to the ceiling.

Therefore, as a player, in the low-frequency support mode, the player operates the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 in order to win the through gate 35A, and when the player wins the support, or the special winning. When the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the mouth 52, the operation mode of the firing operating device 28 is switched so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3 to win the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 32a. ..

In the high frequency support mode, although the prize balls are not paid out depending on the winning of the through gate 35B, the support is frequently won as compared with the low frequency support mode, and the prize is awarded based on the winning of the working opening 34. You can get a sphere. Since the opening/closing execution mode is entered by winning the prize in the operation opening 34, a prize ball can be obtained by winning the prize in the special winning opening 32a. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player basically operates the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3 to win the through gate 35B.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 realizes the ceiling function by using the special accessory 33, and realizes a novel game by using the prize on the general side and the prize on the special side and the height of the support mode. ing.

It should be noted that, as described above, the support lottery can also be received by winning the through-gate 35B, and by being the support win, even in the low-frequency support mode, the opening is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball in the general electric accessory 34a. Since the winning is allowed in the working opening 34, some players may operate the firing operation device 28 so as to win the through gate 35B even in the low frequency support mode. In this case, the special winning opening 52 cannot be won, but the easiness of the winning in the through gate 35A and the through gate 35B, that is, depending on the nail 24b and the gauge configuration, the shooting is performed to win the through gate 35B. There is also a merit of operating the operating device 28.

In particular, in the present pachinko machine 10, from the viewpoint of the suitable progress of the game in the high frequency support mode, adjustment of the rate of discharge, etc., the arrangement of the nails 24b so that the through gate 35B is easier to win the prize than the through gate 35A. And gauge configurations are designed. That is, in the high-frequency support mode, it is necessary to make it easier to win the through gate 35B so that the working opening 34 can be easily won. There is a concern that the winning rate may rise due to the winning in the mouth 52. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the firing operation device 28 is operated by aiming at either the left or right through gates 35A and 35B, a merit arises and both game playability can be realized, and any through gates 35A and 35B can be realized. A new game has been added, which allows the player to select whether to operate the firing operation device 28 aiming at.

However, in the present embodiment, when the prize is given to the through gate 35A, the prize ball is paid out based on the prize at the special prize opening 52 or the general prize opening 53, and the number of ceilings is related, and the prize is given to the through gate 35A. The merit is set to be larger than the merit of winning the through gate 35B. Basically, as described above, the player operates the firing operation device 28 so as to win the through gate 35A in the low frequency support mode. Manipulate.

The distribution result for the support type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 83. As the distribution table, the distribution table for the first special map used for distribution determination of the holding information acquired based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 and the winning of the operating opening 34 are acquired. A distribution table for the second special map, which is used in the distribution determination of the hold information, is set. Then, a low-frequency result and a high-frequency result are set as the distribution results in these distribution tables.

When the distribution result is the low frequency result, the support mode after the corresponding opening/closing execution mode is ended is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before that. This low frequency support mode continues until the next big hit result is set to the high frequency support mode.

When the distribution result is the high frequency result, the support mode after the corresponding opening/closing execution mode is ended is set to the high frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before that. This high frequency support mode is a high frequency support mode with a limited number of times of shifting to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

As the distribution table for the first special figure, a common distribution table is set regardless of whether the support mode is high or low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9B, the high-frequency result is selected regardless of the value of the support type counter C2. Therefore, when shifting to the open/close execution mode triggered by the hold information acquired based on the winning of the special winning opening 52, the high frequency support mode is always set thereafter.

As the distribution table for the second special figure, different distribution tables are set depending on the level of the support mode. Specifically, in the distribution table for the second special figure referred to in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 9C, the high frequency result is selected regardless of the value of the support type counter C2. It has become so. Therefore, when shifting to the open/close execution mode triggered by the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operating opening 34 in the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is always set thereafter. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure referred to in the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 9D, “0” is among the values of the support type counter C2 of “0 to 27”. Corresponding to low frequency results, "1-27" corresponds to high frequency results. Therefore, when shifting to the open/close execution mode triggered by the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operation opening 34 in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is higher than the probability that the low frequency support mode is set thereafter. Has a higher probability of being set.

That is, in the low frequency support mode, if the opening/closing execution mode is entered based on the winning of either the special winning opening 52 or the working opening 34, the high frequency support mode is always entered after that. Then, in the high frequency support mode, after the opening/closing execution mode, which is shifted based on the winning of the operating port 34, the low frequency support mode is shifted with a probability of 1/28.

Next, the first reach random number counter C3 and the second reach random number counter C5 will be described.

The first reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The first reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and as described above, is stored in the special figure holding area 102 at the timing when the game ball wins the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

Further, the second reach random number counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of, for example, 0 to 283, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The second reach random number counter C5 is periodically updated and is stored in the execution area 107 for a general figure on condition that the hold information is not stored at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the variable display of the universal figure display unit 39 is started and the variable display of the symbol display device 42 is started when the game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B. It In addition, when the winning in the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 is triggered, the variable display of the special symbol display portions 38a and 38b is started and the variable display of the symbol display device 42 is started. That is, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of winnings that trigger the variable display on the symbol display device 42.

In the following description, the variable display of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B and the variable display of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning of the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 will be described. In order to distinguish them, the variable display of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning on the through gates 35A and 35B is also referred to as a general figure sub-variation, and the special display sub of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning of the actuating port 34 or the special winning port 52. Also called fluctuation. Further, in order to distinguish the variable display of the universal figure display unit 39 based on the winning on the through gates 35A and 35B from the above-mentioned universal figure sub-variation, the variable display of the universal figure display unit 39 is also referred to as a regular figure main variation. Further, in order to distinguish the variation display of the special figure display portions 38a, 38b based on the winning of the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 from the above special figure sub-variation, the variation display of the special figure display portions 38a, 38b is a special figure. Also called main fluctuation.

Here, the reach display is provided with a symbol display device 42 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (symbol), and varies in the game time when a shift to the open/close execution mode or the support execution mode occurs. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the display is the special display result, before the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 42 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, It is a display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state that easily causes the special display result.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for some of the symbol rows displayed on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, so that a combination of jackpot symbols may be achieved. A combination of is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns is included. Further, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen to perform a reach effect.

In the special figure sub-variation during the low frequency support mode, the reach display is executed in the game time when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the value of the first reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game time that does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode, when the first reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the first reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 83. To be executed.

Further, in the universal figure sub-variation during the low frequency support mode, the reach display is executed regardless of the value of the second reach random number counter C5 in the game time when the game is switched to the support execution mode. Further, in the game times that do not shift to the support execution mode, when the second reach random number counter C5 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the second reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 83. To be executed.

Here, in the low frequency support mode, the same display mode is set for the variation display of each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 in the special figure sub-variation and the general figure sub-variation. In the reach display in the special figure sub-variation and the reach display in the general figure sub-variation, although the effect contents of a plurality of reach displays are respectively set, the types thereof are the same. In addition, in the special figure sub-variation, when switching to the open/close execution mode, and in the case of shifting to the support execution mode in the general figure sub-variation, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line, and the game time ends. To do. Therefore, the player cannot specify which of the special figure sub-variation and the general figure sub-variation is being executed from the effect contents of the symbol display device 42. Further, even if the symbol is finally stopped, the combination of the symbols can be triggered by any fluctuation on the universal symbol side or the special symbol side until either the special electrical prize winning device 32 or the universal electric accessory 34a is opened. It is not possible to specify what was formed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the effect on the special drawing side is the same as the effect on the normal figure side in the effect by the symbol display device 42, while increasing the player's willingness to continue the game by using the ceiling function of the special accessory 33. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the ceiling function is realized based on the winning of the through gate 35A, and it is possible to raise the attention of the winning of the through gate 35A.

In the high frequency support mode, the reach display does not occur regardless of the numerical information of the reach random number counters C3 and C5 and the game result. Specifically, as the effect of each game time of the symbol display device 42 in the high frequency support mode, the variation display of each game time of the general figure sub variation and the special figure sub variation is not executed, and the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode. Only when the game is played, a jackpot notification of that effect (for example, a character display of jackpot and an effect such as a sound effect) is performed. This is a device for suppressing the slack in the inside caused by performing the out-of-direction effect during the continuous vacation.

Next, the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 will be described.

The first fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The first variation type counter CS1 is a variation display time (display continuation period) in the special figure display portions 38a and 38b, that is, a variation display time of the special figure main variation, and a variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 42, that is, a special figure. The variable display time of the sub-variation is used by the MPU 82 for determination. The first variation type counter CS1 is acquired when determining the effect pattern at the start of the special figure main variation and at the start of the special figure sub variation.

The second fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The second fluctuation type counter CS2 is a fluctuation display time (display continuation period) in the public figure display unit 39, that is, a fluctuation display time of the main figure main fluctuation, and a fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 42, that is, a general figure sub fluctuation. The variable display time and the variable display time are used in the MPU 82. The second variation type counter CS2 is different from the first variation type counter CS1 in the general-purpose execution area 107 on condition that the hold information is not stored at the timing when the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B occurs. Is stored.

In determining these variable display times, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 83 is referred to.

The variation display time table in the special figure main variation and the special figure sub-variation is the case where the effect for game play is executed in the low frequency support mode triggered by the hold information related to the working opening 34 or the hold information related to the special winning opening 52. And the case where the effect for game play is executed with the holding information related to the operation opening 34 or the holding information related to the special winning opening 52 in the high frequency support mode as a trigger. The variable display time in the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the variable display time in the low frequency support mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10A, the variable display time in the low frequency support mode is set to 20 sec, and after the variable display, the result of the jackpot lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec. It Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, the variable display time in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.64 sec, and after the variable display, the result of the jackpot lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec.

That is, the information on the fluctuation display time in the special figure main fluctuation and the special figure sub fluctuation read during the high frequency support mode, and the fluctuation display time in the special figure main fluctuation and the special figure sub fluctuation read during the low frequency support mode. Although the lengths thereof are different, they are the same regardless of the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the variable display time information stored in advance. Further, in the high frequency support mode, a game is played aiming at a prize for the operating port 34, and a prize for the special prize port 52 is unintentionally generated, so that the effect for the game use can be shortened. preferable.

On the other hand, the fluctuation display time table in the general figure main fluctuation and the general figure sub fluctuation is similar to the fluctuation display time table in the special figure main fluctuation and special figure sub fluctuation, and the winnings to the through gates 35A and 35B in the low frequency support mode are won. The case where the game-use effect is executed as a trigger and the case where the game-use effect is executed when the prize is given to the through gates 35A and 35B in the high-frequency support mode are separately stored. The variable display time in the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the variable display time in the low frequency support mode. However, unlike the fluctuation display time table for special figure main fluctuation and special figure sub fluctuation, the fluctuation display time table for general figure main fluctuation and general figure sub fluctuation is the fluctuation display time for when the reach is not generated in the low frequency support mode. A table and a variable display time table for reach occurrence are set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10C, in the variation display time table for the non-reach occurrence in the low frequency support mode, a plurality of values are set according to the value of the second variation type counter CS2. In the embodiment, three types of 12.0 sec, 15.0 sec, and 18.0 sec are set, and after the variable display, the result of the support lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec. Further, in the variation display time table for reach occurrence in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 10(d), the second variation type counter CS2 is set to be longer than the variation display time when no reach occurs. A plurality of types are set according to the value of, and in the present embodiment, three types of 24 sec, 36 sec, and 42 sec are set, and further, after the variable display, the result of the support lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec. On the other hand, the variable display time in the high-frequency support mode is set to the same 2.74 sec as shown in FIG. 10(e), and the result of the support lottery is 0.6 sec after the variable display. Maintained throughout.

That is, the information on the fluctuation display time in the main figure main fluctuation and the general figure sub fluctuation read during the high-frequency support mode is the same regardless of which of the through gates 35A and 35B is won. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the variable display time information stored in advance. Further, the information about the fluctuation display time in the main figure main fluctuation and the general figure sub fluctuation read during the low frequency support mode differs depending on the presence or absence of the reach occurrence and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. It is possible to make various effects for game diversion in the figure sub-variation. Further, the variable display time set in the low frequency support mode is the time (period) expected to be required from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35A until the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53 is won. ) (For example, 10 seconds). This operation will be described later in detail.

As for the variable display time on the special figure side, the variable display time may be set to be different when the reach is generated and when the reach is not generated, like the variable display time on the general figure side.

Next, the ordinary electric random number counter C4 will be described.

The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 719, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated and, as already described, is stored in the execution area 107 of the universal figure holding area 106 on condition that the holding information is not stored at the timing of winning the through gates 35A and 35B. It As described above, the support lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric power accessories 34a in the open state by using the value of the general electric power random number counter C4.

As described above, although the winning probability of the support lottery differs depending on the support mode, the opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a when the support is won is the same.

Specifically, in the universal figure win/loss table referred to in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 11A, the support win result and the miss result are set as win/fail results. When the result of the lottery is the result of the support win, the ordinary electric utility article 34a is opened once, and the opening duration is set to 5 seconds. Regarding the value of the ordinary electric random number counter C4, "0-5" of "0-719" corresponds to the support winning result, and "6-719" corresponds to the deviating result.

In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the universal electric accessory 34a is opened with a probability of 1/120 based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, and for example, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the through gate 35A. In such a case, if the lottery result associated with the winning of the through-gate 35A becomes the support winning result, the working opening 34 can be won. It is possible to transfer.

In the universal figure win/loss table referred to in the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 11B, the support win result and the miss result are set as the win result. When the result of the lottery is the result of the support win, the ordinary electric utility article 34a is opened once, and the opening duration is set to 5 seconds. Regarding the value of the ordinary electric random number counter C4, "0-575" of "0-719" corresponds to the support winning result, and "576-719" corresponds to the deviating result. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, the general electric utility object 34a is opened with a probability of 12/15 based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, and the working port 34 is brought into the operation port 34 earlier than in the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to make a prize.

The case where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode instead of the open/close execution mode corresponds to the normal gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, instead of the configuration in which each lottery counter is provided in the RAM 84, the MPU 82 may be provided as a dedicated circuit so as not to contribute to updating the random number.

<Various processes executed by MPU82>
Next, each process executed by the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the MPU 82 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits for 1 sec after the main process is activated without proceeding to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 84 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 82 is set.

Then, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and firing control device 78 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 84. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In the following step S107, it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 84 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 84. Then, it progresses to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch is not pressed, on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, the process of step S108 is not executed and step S109 is executed. Proceed to. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 84 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound and light control device 300 in order to recognize the current game state. To do. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 77 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 77. Further, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, in step S112, the fluctuation counter updating process for updating the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2. To execute. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 84, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing the timer interrupt process in the MPU 82 will be described. A clock circuit is provided on the main control board 81 as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and a frequency divider circuit is provided so as to be present at an intermediate position of a signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 82. Is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the activation timing of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 82. That is, a pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 82 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The MPU 82 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as a rise or a fall of the pulse signal, and activates and executes a timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. To do.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is activated when the interrupt is changed from the disabled state to the enabled state. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the execution status of the process in the MPU 82, the next timer interrupt process may be started 4.1 msec after the previous timer interrupt process was started, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt process is started. The timer interrupt process will be started 3.9 msec after the immediately preceding timer interrupt process is started.

However, the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the processing in the MPU 82, so basically the timer interrupt processing is activated at the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 82 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing is In the timer interrupt processing in, the amount exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and in the timer interrupt processing at the next timing, the timer interrupt processing is activated at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 85, and when the occurrence of power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In subsequent step S202, lottery random number update processing is executed. In the lottery random number updating process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, the first reach random number counter C3, the universal electric random number counter C4, and the second reach random number counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the present numerical information is sequentially read from the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, the first reach random number counter C3, the universal electric random number counter C4, and the second reach random number counter C5, and the read numerical information is respectively obtained. After the process of adding 1 is executed, the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, if a fraudulent activity is detected in the previous or previous timer interrupt process, it is determined that the progress of the game should be stopped, and the process for advancing the game is executed. Stop. The fraud detection process is a process performed in step S211 described later.

After that, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing of step S207 and subsequent steps is executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special winning opening 32a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit 32c for special electric power is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal.

Further, when the information for switching the universal electric accessory 34a of the operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the general electric power is started and the information for switching to the closed state is displayed. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a are read, and the general winning opening 31, the big winning opening 32a, the working opening 34, the through gates 35A, 35B, and the special winning. A process for specifying whether or not there is a winning in the mouth 52 and the general winning opening 53 is executed.

In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 84 is executed. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical value information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

In a succeeding step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a fraudulent activity set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed. If the set illegal action has occurred, it is determined that the progress of the game should be stopped in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process.

In a succeeding step S212, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation is continued to the firing operation device 28, as described above, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

In the following step S213, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each detection sensor 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a, gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame. Confirm the opening of 14.

In the following step S214, special figure special electric power control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of opening/closing execution mode is executed, and in step S215, support lottery for general electric power accessory 34a and general electric power object 34a are executed. Executes the universal/universal control process for controlling the opening/closing.

In the following step S216, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, the output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display portion 38a and the second special figure display portion 38b is set, and The output information for updating the display content of the public figure display unit 39 is set.

In a succeeding step S217, a demo display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 42 for standby display in a situation where neither the game time nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed is executed, and in a step S218, The contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state receiving process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S219, payout output processing for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed.

In the subsequent step S220, the state of signal output to the external terminal board 79 is switched so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing. The external information setting process of is executed. Further, in step S221, a process for editing the trial shooting test information is executed.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S206, or after the processing of steps S207 to S221 has been executed, the operation proceeds to step S222. In step S222, an interrupt end declaration is set. In the MPU 82, once the timer interrupt processing is activated, it is defined that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for the next timer interrupt processing to be activated. In step S222, the next timer interrupt processing is set. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable execution of interrupt processing. In step S223, interrupt permission is set. In the MPU 82, once the timer interrupt processing is activated, it is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step S223, the interrupt enable setting is performed to enable execution of the next timer interrupt processing. After that, this timer interrupt processing ends.

Hereinafter, the special figure special power control processing executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing will be described, and the universal figure normal power control processing executed in step S215 will be described.

<Universal control system processing>
First, the general/universal/universal electric vehicle control process executed in step S215 will be described.

In the general/universal-university control process, the process for acquiring the general-purpose-side holding information is executed when a prize is paid to the through gates 35A and 35B, and the general-purpose side holding information is stored When the holding information is present, the support occurrence determination is performed, and the processing for performing the effect for the universal figure is executed when the support occurrence determination is used as a trigger. In addition, based on the result of the support occurrence determination, a process of opening and closing the universal electric accessory 34a of the operation port 34 is executed.

In the general/universal/universal electric vehicle control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 14, first, in step S301, a process of acquiring the reservation information on the general/universal side is executed. Now, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15, the process of acquiring the reservation information on the universal figure side will be described. First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the first universal symbol winning flag is set to "1". .. The first universal figure prize flag is a flag that is set when the player wins the through gate 35A provided in the left side area PE2 among the through gates 35A and 35B provided in the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. It is provided in.

When an affirmative decision is made in step S401, the first universal figure winning flag is cleared in step S402, and the first universal figure winning counter is incremented by 1 in the following step S403. The first universal figure winning prize counter is provided in the RAM 84, the initial value is "0", and 1 is added every time the first universal figure winning prize flag is set. The number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A provided in the left side area PE2, that is, the number of game balls that have passed through the ball passage opening 33a is counted by the first universal winning prize counter.

When a negative determination is made in step S401, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the second universal figure winning award flag is set. The second universal figure winning flag is a flag that is set when the player wins the through gate 35B provided in the right side area PE3 among the through gates 35A and 35B provided in the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, and the RAM 84. It is provided in.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S404, the second universal figure winning flag is cleared in step S405. If a negative determination is made in step S404, the reservation information acquisition process on the side of the general-purpose figure ends as it is.

After the execution of step S403 or step S405, it is determined in step S406 whether or not the numerical information of the universal figure/universal counter provided in the RAM 84 is "0".

Here, in the universal figure universal communication control processing (FIG. 14) in which the reservation information acquisition processing on the regular universal figure side is performed, the processing relating to the effect for the universal figure as described above, and the opening/closing of the universal utility product 34a are performed. Such processing is included. In this case, as the process relating to the effect for the general figure, the general figure variation start process (step S307), the universal figure changing process (step S308), and the general figure finalizing process (step S309) are set. ing. Further, as the process related to opening/closing of the universal electric accessory 34a, a process during opening of the universal electric power (step S310) and a process during closing of the universal electric power device (step S311) are set.

In such a processing configuration, the universal figure/universal counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to know which of the above-described plural types of processing should be executed, and the universal figure/universal counter provided in the ROM 83. In the address table, the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set in association with the numerical information of the Uzu-Uden counter.

The numerical value of "0" to "4" can be set in the POU-PHODEN counter, and the POU-PHODEN address table is made to correspond to each numeric information of the POU-PHODEN counter one-to-one and started. Address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the universal figure fluctuation starting process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the universal figure changing process, and the start address NSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the universal figure confirming process, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the universal call releasing process, and the start address NSA4 is the general address closing This is the start address of the program for executing the process.

The general/universal/general-purpose counter will be triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information has been completed is satisfied, and 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared according to the processing executed in the power control processing. Therefore, in the universal figure/universal communication control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the universal figure/universal communication counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the MPU 82 to know which process is to be executed as the universal figure/general electric control without checking the presence/absence of various flags. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

That is, in step S406, the case where the numerical information of the universal figure/universal counter is “0” is a situation in which the universal figure variation start process can be executed. Specifically, it is based on the pending information on the universal figure side. The game is not being played and the support execution mode is not being set.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S406, then in the subsequent step S407, the numerical information of the ordinary electric random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5, and the second variation type counter CS2 is used for the ordinary figure in the ordinary figure holding area 106. Stored in the execution area 107.

When a negative determination is made in step S406 or after the process of step S407 is executed, the process for ceiling counting is executed in steps S408 to S413. Specifically, first, in step S408, it is determined whether or not the value of the first universal figure winning award counter is "251". That is, in step S408, it is determined whether or not the number of game spheres entering the special accessory 33 is about to reach 256, which is the ceiling, soon. When an affirmative determination is made in step S408, the ceiling advance notice command is set as an output target to the sound and light control device 300 in step S409. The various commands set as output targets in the MPU 82 are transmitted to the output destination control device without executing any special processing in the processing of the MPU 82 program.

At this time, the determination value (=251) in step S408 is an intermediate number smaller than the number of ceilings (=256) for jackpot winning, and it is also possible to set a plurality of numbers smaller than “256”. For example, a plurality of settings such as “241”, “246”, and “251” may be set, and the ceiling advance notice command may be set each time the number of times is reached.

When the ceiling light advance command is received, the sound/light control device 300 executes processing for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the ceiling light advance command. Specifically, a data table for causing an effect corresponding to the ceiling notice to be performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the ROM 303 of the sound and light control device 300, and the ceiling notice is used according to the read data table. The effect is displayed on the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65.

In addition, a performance-type command corresponding to the ceiling notice command is transmitted to the display control device 400. The display control device 400 reads the data table for allowing the ceiling notice to be given through the symbol display device 42, and displays the effect for the ceiling notice according to the read data table. The effect for the ceiling notice is specifically an effect for informing the player that there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be generated when the next five wins occur at the through gate 35A of the left side area PE2, and for example, the design The ceiling announcement character appears in an area other than the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3.

When a negative determination is made in step S408 or after the execution of step S409, it is determined in step S410 whether or not the value of the first universal figure prize counter is "256". In other words, in step S410, the game ball that has entered the special accessory 33 this time is the 256th game ball after the initial value has been set in the first universal prize winning counter (that is, since the last time the special winning opening 52 was won). Or not. When a negative determination is made in step S410, the process of acquiring the reservation information on the main body drawing side is ended as it is.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S410, the operation proceeds to step S411, the first universal figure winning award counter is cleared, and the processing for obtaining the holding information on the regular universal figure side is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the general/universal communication control process (FIG. 14 ), after executing the acquisition process of the hold information in step S301, the process proceeds to step S302. In step S302, a process of reading the information of the POU/DOU counter is executed. In a succeeding step S303, a process of reading the universal figure universal address table is executed. Then, in step S304, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the universal figure/universal counter from the universal figure/universal address table is executed.

As described above, in the universal figure/universal control process, the universal figure/universal counter and the universal figure/universal address table are used to start the universal figure variation process, the universal figure variation process, the universal figure confirmation process, Execute the open process and the normal power close process. The configuration for executing each of these processes will be described below.

First, in step S305, a zero flag setting process on the universal figure side is executed. In the process of setting the zero flag on the universal figure side, the numerical information of the universal figure universal telephone timer counter is read out, and when the numerical information of the universal figure universal telephone timer counter is “0”, the universal figure side provided in the register of the MPU 82 is read. The process of setting "1" to the zero flag of is executed. The universal figure universal communication timer counter is a counter used for the MPU 82 to specify the update timing of the universal figure universal communication counter according to the passage of time, and the numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time is from step S307 to step S307. The numerical information is set in each process of S311, and the numerical information is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

In the following step S306, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the general map fluctuation start process of step S307, and when the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to general map fluctuation process of step S308. If the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to the universal figure fixing process in step S309, and if the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to the universal communication opening process in step S310 to acquire the acquired start address. If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the process of closing the universal communication in step S311. Then, after executing any one of steps S307 to S311, the general/universal figure universal communication control process is ended. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S307 to S311 will be individually described.

<Universal figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the universal figure fluctuation start process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the universal figure fluctuation starting process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high-frequency flag provided in the RAM 84. The high-frequency flag is a flag that is referred to when the MPU 82 specifies whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode, and the MPU 82 switches to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode. When shifting, "1" is set.

Further, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game number counter provided in the RAM 84 is "0". The number-of-games counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to specify whether or not the number of end-reference times (specifically, 100) of games has been exhausted in the high-frequency support mode. By the way, the setting of the end reference number to the game number counter is performed when the high frequency support mode is set after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the numerical information set in the game number counter is to end the game number. Is updated so that 1 is subtracted.

When a positive determination is made in both step S501 and step S502, the high frequency flag is cleared in step S503. As a result, the support mode of the general electric accessory 34a shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Here, the universal figure fluctuation start processing is a situation in which the numerical information of the universal figure universal communication counter corresponds to the processing during the universal communication opening processing or the universal communication closing processing, that is, the universal communication object 34a in the case where the support is elected. It is not executed in the support execution mode of. Therefore, the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode even if the end reference number of game times is ended during the support execution mode based on the fact that the support is won before the end reference number of game times is ended. After the support execution mode ends, the low frequency support mode is switched to.

In a succeeding step S504, an external output setting process for frequent release is executed. In the external output setting process, the data of the RAM 84 is set so that the output of the high frequency signal from the external terminal board 79 to the game hall management computer is stopped. The high-frequency signal starts to be output when the high-frequency support mode is entered. Incidentally, the output stop of the high frequency signal is executed by the external information setting process of step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Further, in step S504, the high-frequency end command is set as an output target to the sound/light control device 300. The high-frequency end command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to recognize that the high-frequency support mode has ended.

When a negative determination is made in either step S501 or step S502, or after the processing in step S504 is executed, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not there is reservation information on the universal figure side. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the execution area 107 for the general figure in the general figure reservation area 106. If there is no hold information, the normal/universal figure variation start process is ended as it is, and if there is hold information, it is determined in step S506 whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency flag. If an affirmative decision is made in step S506, the high-frequency universal figure valid/invalid table is read from the ROM 83 in step S507, and if a negative decision is made in step S506, a low-frequency universal figure acceptance table is read in step S508. The figure validity table is read. After reading the corresponding universal figure valid/invalid table in step S507 or step S508, the process proceeds to step S509.

In step S509, a win/fail judgment process is executed. In the hit/miss judgment processing, the information for hit/damage determination stored in the execution area 107 for the drawing, that is, the numerical information related to the charge/denial random number counter C4 is referred to by referring to the drawing/drawing validity table read in step S507 or step S508. It is determined whether or not any of the hit results corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether the result is a support win or a miss result.

In a succeeding step S510, a process of grasping the variable display time and the stop result is executed. When grasping the variable display time, in the low frequency support mode, the current numerical value information of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is read, and the numerical value information of the variable display time corresponding to the numerical value information is read from the corresponding variable display time table. .. More specifically, when the support is won or when the second reach random number counter C5 corresponds to the reach occurrence, the reach display variable display time table is read to determine the variable display time. Further, in the case where it is not the support winning and the second reach random number counter C5 does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is read to determine the variable display time. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, numerical information of a single variable display time is read.

Further, when grasping the stop result, information of the stop result to be displayed on the universal figure display unit 39 corresponding to the case where the game time to be started this time is finished is read from the ROM 83. In this case, the information on the stop result corresponding to the content of the result of the win/fail is read.

In the following step S511, the numerical information of the variable display time read in step S510 is set in the universal figure universal communication timer counter.

In a succeeding step S512, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity counter is “0”. The situation where the special map special power counter is “0” is a situation where the game is not being played based on the reservation information on the special map side and the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed. If an affirmative decision is made in step S512, then in step S513 a variation command and type command corresponding to the contents of the fluctuation display time, the contents of the acceptance/rejection result, and the contents of the distribution result are sent to the sound and light control device 300. Set as the output target of. The variation command includes information on the variation display time. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

When a negative determination is made in step S512 or after the processing in step S513 is executed, in step S514, fluctuation display is started on the general figure display unit 39 that is the target of fluctuation start this time. In a succeeding step S515, 1 is added to the universal figure/genuine counter. As a result, the numerical information of the Uzu-Uden counter is updated from "0" to "1". After that, the general map variation start process is ended.

As described above, when the negative determination is made in step S512, the variation command and the type command according to the content of the variation display time, the content of the result of acceptance and the content of the distribution result are sent to the sound and light control device 300. By the configuration that is not set as the output target of, while the effect for game use based on the hold information on the special map side is being executed, as the effect for game use based on the hold information on the general figure side, It is possible to prevent the main figure sub-variation from starting while the general figure main variation starts.

<Processing during changes in the universal map>
The universal figure changing process of step S298 in the universal figure universal control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG.

In the ordinary figure changing process, first, in step S601, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set to the zero flag on the ordinary figure side provided in the register of the MPU 82. It is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. If a negative decision is made in step S601, the operation proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the universal figure display unit 39 which is the target of the variable display in the effect for game play this time. If it is not the update timing, the processing during fluctuation of the general-purpose figure is ended as it is. If it is the update timing, in step S603, the update content read processing is executed. The update content is stored in the ROM 83 as an update data table, and in step S603, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the data table.

In the following step S604, the update content read in step S603 is set for the update of the general figure display unit 39 this time. By the way, the process for actually updating the display content of the universal figure display unit 39 is executed by the display control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). After that, the process of changing the normal map is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S601, then it is decided in step S605 whether or not the special figure tokuden counter is "0", as in step S512 of the universal figure variation start process (FIG. 16). .. When an affirmative determination is made in step S605, the final stop command for universal drawing is set as the output target to the sound and light control device 300. The final stop command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to recognize that it is the timing to start the final stop display for the effect for this game use.

When the final stop command is received, the sound/light control device 300 executes processing for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the final stop command. Specifically, a data table for causing an effect corresponding to the final stop display to be performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the ROM 303 of the sound/light control device 300, and the final stop is performed according to the read data table. A display effect is displayed on the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 65. Such a data table corresponds to the final stop time.

In addition, a production-type command corresponding to the final stop command is transmitted to the display control device 400. In the display control device 400, a data table for allowing the final stop display from the command to be performed through the symbol display device 42 is read from the program ROM 403 of the display control device 400, and according to the read data table, for the current game time. The final stop result of the production is displayed.

When a negative determination is made in step S605 or after the execution of step S606, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, a process of reading the stop result is executed. In the read process, the stop result information set in the RAM 84 in step S510 of the universal figure variation start process (FIG. 16) is read at the start of the current game time. In the following step S608, the information on the read stop result is set for updating the public figure display portion 39 corresponding to the effect for the game play this time.

In a succeeding step S609, information of a single final stop time (for example, 0.6 sec) stored in advance in the ROM 83 is read out, and the information of the final stop time is set in the universal figure/universal timer counter. After that, in step S610, the universal figure/universal phone counter is incremented by 1, and then the regular/universal figure changing process is ended. In this case, the numerical information of the Uzu-Uden counter is updated from "1" to "2".

As described above, when the negative determination is made in step S605, the final stop command for general purpose is not set as the output target to the sound and light control device 300, so that the special figure side is suspended. While the game-based production based on the information is being executed by the symbol display device 42, the general-use figure main variation ends as the game-use production based on the holding information on the universal figure side, but the universal figure sub-variation ends. It becomes possible not to do it.

<Process during finalization of general map>
In the universal figure finalizing process in step S309 in the universal figure universal communication control process (FIG. 14), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, in step S701, the universal figure universal timer timer counter is set in the universal figure changing process. It is determined whether or not the set final stop time has elapsed. In the determination process, it is specifically determined whether the zero flag is set to "1".

If the final stop time has not elapsed, the process for finalizing the normal map is ended as it is, and if the final stop time has elapsed, in step S702, the support that triggered the variable display this time. It is determined whether or not the result of the winning/disapproving judgment is a support winning. If the support is not elected, in step S703, the numerical information of the general/universal-general-purpose counter is cleared to “0”, and then the regular-universal-diagram finalizing process is ended. If it is a support win, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, the ordinary electric power open counter provided in the RAM 84 is set to "1", and in step S506, the ordinary electric prize winning counter provided in the RAM 84 is set to "10". The ordinary electric power open counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of times of opening the ordinary electric power object 34a in the support execution mode of this time by the MPU 82, and the ordinary electric prize winning counter is a prize for the working opening 34 in the current support execution mode. This is a counter for the MPU 82 to specify whether or not the upper limit number has occurred.

In a succeeding step S706, a process of setting "1" to the support flag provided in the RAM 84 is executed. The support flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify that it is in the support execution mode, and is cleared in the normal electric power closing process (step S301) at the end of the support execution mode.

After executing the process of step S706, in subsequent step S707, numerical information of the open duration time (specifically, 5 sec) is set in the universal figure universal power timer counter.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the support execution mode ends when either the upper limit number of 10 game balls wins the operation opening 34 or when 5 seconds elapse. In this case, since the opening duration is set longer than the firing cycle, at least one winning can be expected, but the product of the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball and the upper limit number is greater than the opening duration. Since it is too short, you cannot expect to win the maximum number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball out and suppress the euphoria while making it possible to win a prize in the operating opening 34 that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode when the support is won.

In the following step S708, similarly to step S512 of the universal figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 16) and step S605 of the universal figure fluctuation process (FIG. 17), it is determined whether or not the special figure tokuden counter is “0”. ..

When a positive determination is made in step S708, the opening command is set as an output target to the sound and light control device 300 in step S709. The opening command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to recognize that the support electoral result is generated and the general electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state.

When the sound/light control device 300 receives an opening command for general purpose, the sound/light control device 300 executes a process for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the opening command. Specifically, in order to allow the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 to perform an effect corresponding to the transition from the closed state to the open state of the general electric accessory 34a triggered by the support winning result. Data table is read from the ROM 303 of the sound/light control device 300, and the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 65 are caused to perform an effect for the support execution mode in accordance with the read data table.

Moreover, the command of the production system corresponding to the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 400. In the display control device 400, an effect corresponding to the transition from the closed state to the open state of the general electric accessory 34a triggered by the result of the support winning result from the command is performed through the symbol display device 42. A data table for reading is read from the program ROM 403 of the display control device 400, and the effect for the support execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 42 according to the read data table.

When a negative determination is made in step S708 or after the execution of step S709, the universal figure universal communication counter is incremented by 1 in step S710, and then the regular figure variation start process is ended. In this case, the numerical information of the Uzu-Uden counter is updated from "2" to "3".

As described above, when the negative determination is made in step S708, the opening command for a general figure is not set as the output target to the sound/light control device 300, and thus the pending information on the special figure side is set. While the effect for game replay based on is being executed by the symbol display device 42, it is possible not to execute the effect for support execution mode based on the hold information on the universal figure side.

<Processing during opening of general electric train>
In the normal electric power releasing processing of step S310 in the general electric power control processing (FIG. 14 ), processing for maintaining the open state of the general electric accessory 34a is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening duration time of the general electric accessory 34a has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in the determination, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number (specifically, 10) of the game balls has won the operating opening 34. When a negative determination is made in the determination of the number of winning prizes, or when a winning of the working opening 34 is not detected, the normal electric current open processing is ended as it is. Also, when the open duration time has elapsed or when the maximum number of prizes has been won, the numerical information of the general electric open counter is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and when the numerical information of the general electric open counter is "0". Ends the support execution mode. Then, after adding 1 to the numerical information of the general/universal/universal electric power counter, the normal/universal electric power open processing is ended. In this case, the numerical information of the Uzu-Uden counter is updated from "3" to "4".

<Processing during closing of the Denden>
In the normal electric power closing process of step S311 in the normal electric power control processing (FIG. 14), processing for shifting the electric power accessory 34a from the open state to the closed state is executed. After that, clear the "Puzu-Uden" counter to "0".

<Special map special power control processing>
Next, the special figure special power control processing executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special map special electric power control process, a process for acquiring special reservation side pending information is executed when a prize is generated in the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52, and the special drawing side pending information is stored. If it is, the winning/non-judgment determination for the special figure is performed on the holding information, and further, the processing for performing the game replay effect is executed with the winning/non-judgment determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the hit/no hit determination, a process of shifting to the open/close execution mode is performed after the game use effect. Further, the processing in the open/close execution mode is executed. However, in the present embodiment, with respect to each of the winnings of the working opening 34 and the special winning opening 52, the number of holdings of the winnings (the number of holdings on the special map side) is “1”, and one has already won and the first In the state where the holding information is stored in the special figure holding area 103 and the second special figure holding area 104, the holding based on the second winning is not held.

In the special figure special power control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, first, in step S801, a special figure side hold information acquisition process is executed. Here, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the special figure side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. First, in step S901, "1" is set to the first special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 84. It is determined whether or not there is. The first special figure winning flag is set when the winning of the special winning opening 52 is specified in the winning detection processing of step S209 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13).

When "1" is set in the first special figure winning flag, the first special figure winning flag is cleared in step S902. In a succeeding step S903, it is determined whether or not the total number PS1 of the holding information on the first special drawing side stored in the first special drawing holding area 103 is “0”. If it is “0”, in step S904, the total number PS1 of pending information on the first special view side is incremented by 1, and in step S905, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S202 immediately before is supported. Numerical information of each of the type counter C2 and the first reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special figure reservation area 103.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, a negative determination is made in step S903, or the process of step S905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S906. In step S906, it is determined whether or not the second special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 84 is set to "1". The second special figure prize flag is set when the prize for the operating port 34 is specified in the prize detection process of step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

If "1" is not set in the second special drawing prize flag, the main acquisition processing is ended as it is, and if "1" is set in the second special drawing prize flag, the second process is performed in step S907. Clear the special map winning flag. In a succeeding step S908, it is determined whether or not the total number PS2 of the holding information on the second special drawing side stored in the second special drawing holding area 104 is “0”. If it is "0", it is determined in step S909 whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure executing flag provided in the RAM 84. The second special figure in-execution flag is set when the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 104 is moved to the special figure executing area 105, and the end of the special figure sub-variation based on the holding information. The flag is cleared at the time of, or when the open/close execution mode is entered based on the hold information.

When "1" is not set in the second special figure in-execution flag, the total number PS2 of the reservation information on the second special figure side is incremented by 1 in step S910. In the following step S911, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, and the first reach random number counter C3 updated in the immediately preceding step S192 is stored in the second special figure reservation area 104.

When a negative determination is made in step S908 or step S909, or after execution of step S910, this acquisition processing ends.

Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 19 ), after executing the process of acquiring the special figure holding information in step S801, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, a process of reading the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the RAM 84 is executed. In a succeeding step S803, a process of reading the special figure special electric address table from the ROM 83 is executed. Then, in step S804, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special telephone counter from the special figure special telephone address table is executed.

Here, the processing contents of steps S802 to S804 will be described.

As described above, the special figure special electric power control process includes a process related to the game turning effect and a process related to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, as the process related to the game turn effect, there are a special figure variation start process (step S807) for starting the game turn effect and a process for advancing the game turn effect. A certain special figure changing process (step S808) and a special figure finalizing process (step S809) for ending the game game effect are set. Further, as the processing related to the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric power start processing (step S810) that is a processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and the special electric power that is a processing for controlling the opening state of the special winning opening 32a. Opening process (step S811), special electric closing process (step S812), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening 32a, and the ending of the opening/closing execution mode and the game state at the end of the opening/closing execution mode The special electric power ending process (step S813), which is a process for controlling the shift of No. 3, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special telephone counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to know which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. The start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plural kinds of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special electric counter.

Explaining the special figure special telephone address table, the special figure special telephone counter can set the numerical information of “0” to “6”, and the special figure special telephone address table has a pair for each numerical information of the special figure special telephone counter. The information of the start address (“PSA0” to “PSA6”) is set in correspondence with 1. In this case, the start address PSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start processing, the start address PSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation processing, and the start address PSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process, the start address PSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power starting process, and the start address PSA4 is executing the special electric power releasing process. The start address PSA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing processing, and the start address PSA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power termination processing. ..

The special map special electric counter controls the special figure special electric control at the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed is triggered. It is updated corresponding to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special power counter.

Using the special map special electric counter and special electric figure address table, special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure changing processing, special figure finalizing processing, special electric power start processing, special electric open processing, special electric closing processing and The processing configuration for executing the special electric power termination processing will be described, and the processing configuration of each processing will be specifically described.

After the processing of step S804 is executed, the zero flag setting processing of the special drawing side is executed in step S805. In the process of setting the zero flag on the special map side, the numerical information of the special map special electric timer counter is read out, and when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, the zero flag of the special figure provided in the register of the MPU 82 is set. The process of setting "1" to is executed. The special figure special power timer counter is a counter used for the MPU 82 to specify the update timing of the special figure special power counter according to the passage of time, and the numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time is from step S807 to step S813. The numerical information is set in each process, and the numerical information is updated by the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

In a succeeding step S806, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S804 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is PSA0, the process jumps to the special figure variation start process of step S807, and when the acquired start address is PSA1, the process jumps to step S808 during the special figure variation process. If the acquired start address is PSA2, the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process of step S809, and if the acquired start address is PSA3, the process jumps to the special electric power start process of step S810 and the acquired start address is In the case of PSA4, the process jumps to the process during opening special electric power in step S811, when the acquired start address is PSA5, the process jumps to process during special electric power closing in step S812, and when the acquired start address is PSA6. It jumps to the special electric power ending processing of step S813. When the processes of steps S807 to S813 have been executed, the special figure special power control process is ended.

Hereinafter, the processes of steps S807 to S813 will be individually described.

In the special figure variation start process executed in step S807, the pending information on the special figure side is held in a pending state (at least one of PS1 and PS2 is 1), and the pending information is a big hit. A win/loss determination process for determining whether or not a win is supported is executed. When the pending information on the special map side is not stored on hold, the special figure variation start process is ended as it is.

Further, in addition to the winning/disabling judgment processing, when the holding information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, the reaching judgment processing for judging whether or not the holding information corresponds to the occurrence of the reach is executed and at that time. Using the numerical information of the first variation type counter CS1 in, the duration time selection processing for selecting the duration time of the game time is executed. Then, the variation command including the information of the duration and the type command including the information of the game result are transmitted to the sound and light control device 300, and the pattern on the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b is displayed. Start variable display. As a result, one game cycle is started, and the special game display section 38 and the symbol display device 42 start the game game effect. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "0" to "1".

In the special figure changing process which is executed in step S808, it is determined whether or not the display continuation time in the game game effect this time has elapsed. When the determination is positive, the confirmation command is set as the output target. The confirmation command is a command for causing the sound/light control device 300, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the time to start the confirmation display for the game game effect this time. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "1" to "2". Further, when the display continuation time in the current game diversion effect has not elapsed, the display content of the special figure display unit 38 is updated, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is not updated, This special figure changing process is ended.

In the special figure finalizing process executed in step S809, it is determined whether or not the finalizing time in the current game production effect has elapsed. When a positive determination is made in the determination, it is determined whether or not the hit/no hit determination result that triggered the game times this time is a jackpot result. If the hit/no hit determination result is a big hit result, the opening command is set as the output target and the opening time is set in the special-design special power timer counter. The opening command is a command for causing the sound/light control device 300, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "2" to "3", and this special figure finalizing process is terminated. In addition, when the hit determination result that triggered the game this time is a miss result, the special map special electric counter is cleared to "0" and the special figure finalizing process is ended.

In the special electric power starting process executed in step S810, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current open/close execution mode has elapsed. If the determination is affirmative, information about the opening duration time is set, and opening setting processing for opening the special winning opening 32a is executed. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is updated from "3" to "4", and this special power start processing is ended. If the opening time has not elapsed, the special electric power start processing is ended as it is.

In the special electric open processing which is executed in step S811, it is determined whether or not the open duration time in the current round game has elapsed. When the determination is negative, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number (specifically, 10) of the game balls in the current round game has won the special winning opening 32a. In the determination of the number of winning prizes, when the negative determination is made or when the winning of the special winning opening 32a is not detected, the special electric open processing is ended as it is. In addition, when the open duration time has elapsed or when the upper limit number is won in the current round game, the round counter provided in the RAM 84 for storing the number of rounds is decremented by 1, and the information of the closing time is set to a large value. A closing setting process for closing the winning opening 32a is executed. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "4" to "5", and the present special electric open processing is ended.

In the special electricity closing process executed in step S812, it is determined whether or not all round games in the current open/close execution mode have ended. If a negative determination is made in the determination, the special prize winning counter provided in the RAM 84 is set with the upper limit number of winnings (specifically, 10) to the special winning opening 32a in the round game, and information on the opening time is set. Is set, and an opening setting process for opening the special winning opening 32a is executed.

If the round game has not ended, it is determined whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening 32a has elapsed. When a positive determination is made in the determination, the winning upper limit number in the round game is set, and the opening time of the special winning opening 32a is set. After that, by subtracting 1 from the special map special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "5" to "4", and this special electric closing process is ended. When the closing time of the special winning opening 32a has not elapsed, this special electric closing process is ended as it is.

When the round game is over, the ending command is set as the output target. The ending command is a command for causing the sound/light control device 300, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the ending effect. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is updated from "5" to "6", and this special power closing processing is ended.

In the special electric power ending process executed in step S813, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed. If the determination is affirmative, the game state is confirmed by referring to the flag of the RAM 84, and the support mode corresponding to the confirmed game state is set. After that, the numerical information of the special map special electric counter is cleared to "0", and the special electric power ending processing is ended.

<Special map fluctuation start processing>
Next, the special figure variation start processing in step S807 will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the first special figure holding area 103 or the second special figure holding area 104. If none of the holding information is stored, the special figure variation start processing is ended as it is. If the hold information is stored in any of them, the data setting process is executed in step S1002.

In the data setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 104. If a negative decision is made, in step S1102, the total number PS1 of pending information on the first special figure side is cleared to "0". In a succeeding step S1103, the reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 103 is moved to the special figure execution area 105.

After that, in step S1104, the second special figure flag provided in the RAM 84 is cleared. The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the execution target for game use is the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operation opening 34. Then, this data setting process is completed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1101, the total number PS2 of the hold information on the second special figure side is cleared to "0" in step S1105. In a succeeding step S1106, the reservation information stored in the second special drawing reservation area 104 is moved to the special drawing execution area 105. In a succeeding step S1107, "1" is set to the second special figure in-execution flag. In a succeeding step S1108, "1" is set to the second special figure flag. Then, this data setting process is completed.

By performing the determination process of step S1101 first as described above, when the pending information is stored in the second special figure holding area 104, it is stored in the first special figure holding area 103. The holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 104 is given priority over the holding information as a target of the hit determination (that is, a game game start target).

Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21 ), after the process of step S1002 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, by determining whether or not the second special map flag is "0", the subject of the variation start this time is based on the hold information acquired when the special winning opening 52 is won ( It is determined whether or not it is 1 reserved information on the special map side).

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1003, the win/fail table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the first special figure are read from the ROM 83 in step S1004, and if a negative decision is made in step S1003. In step S1005, the win/fail table for the second special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure are read from the ROM 83. In step S1005, the high-frequency flag is checked to determine whether the support mode is high or low, and the distribution table corresponding to the grasped support mode is read. After executing the processing of step S1004 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, a win/fail judgment process is executed. In the win/loss determination process, the win/loss table read out in step S1004 or step S1005 is referred to, and information for win/loss determination among the pending information stored in the execution area 105 for special drawings, that is, a numerical value related to the jackpot random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the information corresponds to any of the hit results. Specifically, it is determined whether it corresponds to the jackpot result or the miss result.

In a succeeding step S1007, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination process of step S1006 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If they match, the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, distribution determination processing is executed. In the distribution determination process, the distribution table read out in step S1004 or step S1005 is referred to, and information for distribution determination among the suspension information stored in the execution area 105 for special drawings, that is, the support type counter C2. It is determined whether or not the numerical value information related to (4) corresponds to the sorting result. Specifically, it is determined whether the high-frequency result or the low-frequency result is applicable.

In a succeeding step S1009, it is determined whether or not the result of the sorting determination process of step S1008 is a low frequency result. If the result is a low frequency result, in step S1010, the low frequency result flag provided in the RAM 84 is set to "1". If the result is not a low frequency result, "1" is set to the high frequency result flag in step S1011.

If the jackpot winning is not supported in step S1007, the second special figure execution flag is checked in step S1012, and if "1" is set, it is cleared and is not set. In that case, maintain that state.

After the processing of step S1010, step S1011 or step S1012 is executed, the acquisition information setting processing is executed in step S1013 and then the special figure variation start processing is ended.

Here, the acquisition information setting process of step S1013 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, a process of grasping the fluctuation display time and the stop result is executed. When grasping the variable display time, the level information of the support mode is grasped and the corresponding numerical information of the variable display time is grasped. However, even in the low frequency support mode, when the support execution mode is in progress, the numerical information of a single variable display time corresponding to the high frequency support mode is grasped. In other words, during the low frequency support mode, for example, when a transition to the support execution mode is made based on a prize of the through gate 35A and a prize is generated in the operating port 34, the variable display time (0. 64 sec) is selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the delay due to the long variation display time in the winning of the operation opening 34, which results in a big hit.

Further, in grasping the stop result, the stop result information to be displayed on the special figure display portions 38a and 38b corresponding to the case where the game time to be started this time is finished is read from the ROM 83. In this case, the information of the stop result corresponding to the content of the winning/disapproval result and the content of the distribution result is read. In the following step S1202, the numerical information of the variable display time read in step S1201 is set in the special figure special power timer counter.

In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the support flag. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1203 is a case where the current hold information corresponds to the winning of the working opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 in the support execution mode. When a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, when the winning corresponding to the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 that occurs in a mode other than the support execution mode is dealt with, the content of the variable display time and the result of the success/failure are displayed in step S1204. The change command and the type command according to the content and the content of the distribution result are set as output targets to the sound/light control device 300. The variation command includes information on the variation display time. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the fluctuation command and the classification command are received, the sound and light control device 300 executes processing for setting the sound output pattern and the light control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation command and the classification command. Specifically, a data table for causing an effect corresponding to the current game time to be performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the program ROM 403 of the sound/light control device 300, and according to the read data table. The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 cause the game to be reproduced. This data table corresponds to the variable display time of the current game.

Further, the effect-type commands corresponding to the current variation command and the type command are transmitted to the display control device 400. In the display control device 400, a data table for grasping the type of effect for the current game use from the command and allowing the display effect corresponding to the type to be performed through the symbol display device 42 is displayed. It is read from the program ROM 403, and the symbol display device 42 is caused to perform an effect for game play according to the read data table.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1203, or after the processing of step S1204 has been executed, then in step S1205, fluctuation display is started on the special figure display portions 38a, 38b targeted for fluctuation start this time. In a succeeding step S1206, the special figure special power counter is incremented by one. As a result, the numerical information of the special map/telegraph counter is updated from “0” to “1”. Then, this acquisition information setting process is ended.

As described above, when the negative determination is made in step S1203, the variation command and the type command according to the content of the variation display time, the content of the acceptance result, and the content of the distribution result are sent to the sound and light control device 300. Since it is not set as an output target of, the special map main fluctuation starts, but the special map sub fluctuation starts as the effect based on the pending information on the special map side acquired in the support execution mode. It is possible to prevent it. This is because, at the time of shifting to the support execution mode, the effect that the combination of the same symbols is already formed in the normal figure sub variation is performed, and in such a case, the same effect is further performed in the special figure sub variation. By not having it, it is possible to suppress the production delay.

<Tokuden termination processing>
Next, the special electric power ending processing of step S813 in the special electric power control processing (FIG. 19) will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by checking whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the MPU 82. If the ending time has not elapsed, the special electric power ending process is ended as it is, and if the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, it is determined whether "1" is set in the high frequency result flag of the RAM 84. As described above, the high-frequency result flag is set to "1" when one of the jackpot results is obtained in the hit/miss determination process on the special drawing side and a high-frequency result is obtained in the distribution determination process.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, "1" is set in the high frequency flag of the RAM 84 in step S1303. If "1" is already set in the high-frequency flag, that state is maintained. As a result, the support mode after the open/close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, in the following step S1304, the end reference number "100" is set in the game number counter of the RAM 84.

After that, in step S1305, a high-frequency signal external output setting process is executed. In the external output setting process, the data of the RAM 84 is set so that the output of the high-frequency signal from the external terminal board 79 to the game hall management computer is started. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the management computer in the game hall is in the high frequency support mode. By the way, the output of the high-frequency signal is started by the external information setting process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). In step S1305, the high-frequency command is set as the output target to the sound/light control device 300. The high frequency command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to recognize that the high frequency support mode has been entered.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the high frequency flag of the RAM 84 is cleared in step S1306. If the high-frequency flag is already “0”, that state is maintained. As a result, the support mode after the open/close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. In a succeeding step S1307, the game number counter of the RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S1308, an external output setting process for frequent release is executed. In the external output setting process, the same process as step S504 in the universal figure variation start process (FIG. 16) is executed.

After the process of step S1305 or step S1308 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is cleared to “0” in step S1309, and the flag clear process is executed in step S1310, and then the special electric power ending process is executed. To finish. In the flag clearing process, a process of clearing the second special figure flag, the high frequency result flag, the low frequency result flag and the second special figure in-execution flag is executed.

<Production determination process executed by the sound/light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the sound/light control device 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect determination process is activated by the sound/light control device 300 at regular intervals (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a classification command at the time of universal figure variation (at the time of universal figure winning) are received. When these commands are received, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. The MPU 302 of the sound/light control device 300 receives a high-frequency command from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 in the command handling process that is activated each time a command is received, and thus the high-frequency flag provided in the RAM 304 is set to "1". Is set, and the high-frequency release command is received from the MPU 82 of the main control unit 71 to clear the high-frequency flag. In step S1402, by checking the high frequency flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. In the case of the high frequency support mode, the processing due to the reception of the variation command and the type command at the time of general figure variation in steps S1403 to S1405 is not performed.

If it is the low frequency support mode in step S1402, in a succeeding step S1403, a predetermined symbol determination process is executed based on the contents of the type command for the time of fluctuation of the universal symbol. In this case, the combination of stop symbols is determined according to whether or not the game result of the game time started this time is support winning. Specifically, in the case of support winning, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same combination of symbols is formed on any of the activated lines, and in the case of non-support winning, on any of the activated lines. Also, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same symbol combination is not formed.

Then, in step S1404, processing for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this case, the variation display time (production continuation) corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is referred to by referring to the effect table for the time of universal figure variation stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound/light control device 300. (Period) and the content of the effect. In the sound/light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1404, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game time associated with the winning of the universal figure is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed.

In subsequent step S1405, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1403 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1404 are transmitted to display control device 400. In the display control device 400, based on the received stop result command and the pattern command, a data table for performing the effect for this game play on the symbol display device 42 is read from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400, According to the data table, the drawing list is output to the VDP 405 in the display control device 400 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 42, the effect for game play is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound/light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the high frequency support mode is selected instead of the low frequency support mode in step S1402, the process advances to step S1406. In step S1406, based on the content of the type command received this time, it is determined whether or not support wins. If the support is won, the jackpot notification process is executed in step S1407.

The jackpot notification process is a process for issuing a jackpot notification when shifting to the support execution mode or the open/close execution mode during the high-frequency support mode. As described above, the universal figure sub-variation is not performed during the high frequency support mode. Then, the jackpot notification is performed only in the game time when the game is shifted to the support execution mode or the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 is performed so as to perform the effect corresponding to the big hit notification, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is performed. In step S1407, the jackpot notification command is output to the display control device 400. Based on the received jackpot notification command, the display control device 400 reads a data table for performing the jackpot notification effect on the symbol display device 42 from the program ROM 403, and according to the data table, a predetermined image update timing and The drawing list is output to the VDP 405 every time.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401 or step S1406, or after the processing of step S1405 or step S1407 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command at the time of special figure fluctuation (at the time of special figure winning) are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in the following step S1409 whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. This processing is similar to the processing of step S1402.

When the low frequency support mode is in effect, in step S1410, it is determined whether or not the general figure sub-variation is being executed based on the variation command and the type command when the general figure changes.

If the ordinary figure sub-variation is not being executed, then in step S1411, a predetermined symbol determination process is executed based on the contents of the type command for special figure variation. In this case, the combination of stop symbols is determined according to whether or not the game result of the game time started this time is a jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a big hit result, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same combination of symbols is formed on any of the effective lines, and if it is not a big hit result, on any of the effective lines. Also, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same symbol combination is not formed.

Then, in step S1412, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this case, by referring to the effect table for special figure variation stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound and light control device 300, the variation display time (production continuation) corresponding to the variation command and the type command currently received. (Period) and the content of the effect. In the sound and light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1412, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game time associated with the winning of the universal figure is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed.

Here, the effect table for changing the normal figure and the effect table for changing the special figure will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

As the effect table for the time of change in the universal figure stored in the ROM 303, the addresses As(1) to As(x) referred to by the MPU 302 and the effect patterns Ds(1) to Ds(x) are associated in one-to-one correspondence. Has been. Further, as the effect table for special figure variation, the addresses Ap(1) to Ap(y) referenced by the MPU 302 and the effect patterns Dp(1) to Dp(y) are associated with each other in a one-to-one correspondence. Then, in step S1404 or step S1412, by referring to the received variation command and type command, and by referring to the addresses corresponding to these commands, it is configured to determine the game play effect pattern.

In subsequent step S1413, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1411 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1412 are transmitted to display control device 400. In the display control device 400, based on the received stop result command and the pattern command, a data table for performing the effect for this game play on the symbol display device 42 is read from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400, According to the data table, the drawing list is output to the VDP 405 in the display control device 400 each time a predetermined image update timing comes (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 42, the effect for game play is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound/light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

If the universal figure sub-variation is being executed in step S1410, the process advances to step S1414.

Here, when the sound and light control device 300 receives the variation command and the classification command when the special figure changes, immediately before that, the sound and light control device 300 receives the variation command and the classification command when the general figure changes. Yes, and if the symbol display device 42 is performing the symbol variation effect (general figure sub-variation) for the variation of the figure, in the symbol display device 42, the request for the symbol variation based on the figure/general electric control, It will be overlapped with the request for symbol variation based on the special figure special electric control. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1410, and the sound/light control device 300 sets the effect pattern of the symbol display device 42 based on the request for the universal figure/universal electric control that has occurred in advance, The processing for replacing the control based on the control request is executed in steps S1414 and S1415.

In step S1414, it is determined whether the universal figure sub-variation being executed corresponds to the support winning. If it corresponds to the support win, the process for replacing it with the one based on the request for special figure special electric control is not performed. In other words, even if the request for symbol variation based on the universal figure/general electric control and the request for symbol variation based on the special figure/special electrical control overlap, the request for symbol variation based on the universal figure/general electrical control is selected as a support win. If it is a request for a corresponding symbol variation, it is not replaced with one based on the request for special figure special electric control.

This is because in both the case of moving to the support execution mode and the case of moving to the opening/closing execution mode, the formation of the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and the game times are finished. This is because it is not necessary to replace it in such a situation.

Further, in this case, the symbol variation based on the request for special figure special electric control is not performed. In other words, if the ordinary figure sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling happens to correspond to the support win, the special figure main variation will occur even if the special winning opening 52 is subsequently won, but the special figure sub variation will not occur. .. This is because the win/loss lottery on the special drawing side is a big hit result with a probability of almost 100%, and although a notification corresponding to the big hit result has already been made (combination of the same symbols), a similar result will be notified. Therefore, this is a device for preventing the player from being confused.

Note that, as described above, even when the ball enters the operation port 34 during the support execution mode in the low frequency support mode, similarly, only the notification corresponding to the shift to the support execution mode is performed. However, the configuration may be such that the special map side is notified even in these situations. When the winning probability on the special map side is set to be low, the probability of not shifting to the opening/closing execution mode even if shifting to the support execution mode is high, so it is meaningful to inform the special chart side.

If the universal figure sub-variation being executed does not correspond to the support winning in step S1414, the effect replacement process is executed in step S1415 as a process for replacing with the request based on the special figure special electric control. ..

In the effect replacement process, it is determined which variation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is to be replaced according to the variation display status of the running figure sub variation being executed, and the final stop symbol of the determined symbol row Z1 to Z3 is replaced. Perform processing. In addition, when the normal figure sub-variation that is being executed is replaced with the special figure sub-variation, the fluctuation display time is adjusted so that the sub-variation after the replacement ends at the end timing of the special figure main variation. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is configured to stop the symbols in the order of the upper symbol column Z1→the lower symbol column Z3→the middle symbol column Z2, and the respective symbol columns. The display mode in the case where is stopped is a mode in which the variable display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation and then stopped and displayed. In this case, it is difficult or difficult for the player to visually recognize the changing symbol during high speed fluctuation, and the player can visually recognize the varying symbol during low speed fluctuation. Therefore, when the symbols are replaced, if the symbols in the low-speed changing symbol sequence or the symbols in the stop-displaying symbol sequence are replaced, the player will clearly recognize that the replacement has been performed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the symbols have been replaced, the symbols in the fast-changing symbols are given priority over the symbols in the slow-moving symbols and the symbols in the stopped display. It is designed to be replaced. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the fact that the symbols have been replaced, and to reduce the sense of vanishing effects that have been performed up to that point.

However, depending on the changing situation of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it may be necessary to replace the symbols in the symbol row that is changing at a low speed or the symbol row that is being stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the present production replacement process, as the production pattern based on the request for special figure special electric control, the production pattern corresponding to the big hit result (or rarely, the result of deviation) is replaced. It is desirable that reach display is performed as a premise of the effect pattern of. That is, for example, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 have already been stopped, and if the reach line is not formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, the final stop symbol of the changing middle symbol row Z2 is changed. No matter how they are replaced, it is not possible to form a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, it is grasped whether or not the reach display is being performed in the public figure sub-variation being executed, and if the reach display is not performed, the reach display is performed, and the reach display is performed. If so, the final stop symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced.

Specifically, in the effect replacement process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, in steps S1501 to S1503, a process of grasping whether or not the currently-executed universal figure sub-variation corresponds to reach display is executed. ..

That is, first, in step S1501, the remaining fluctuation display time of the universal figure sub fluctuation is grasped. In the sound and light control device 300, on the basis of receiving the variation command and the type command at the time of the universal figure variation, the variation display time information included in the variation command is input to the progress counter provided in the RAM 304. The elapsed counter is updated by subtracting 1 every predetermined period, and becomes 0 when the set variable display time elapses. In step S1501, by confirming the numerical information of this elapsed counter, the remaining fluctuation display time of the general figure sub fluctuation can be grasped.

In the following step S1502, the fluctuation display time of the special figure sub fluctuation is grasped. Specifically, the special figure variation display time is grasped based on the variation command received at the time of special figure variation received this time.

Then, in step S1503, the remaining variation display time of the general figure sub-variation currently being executed, which is grasped in step S1501, is compared with the variation display time of the current special figure sub-variation grasped in step S1502, It is determined whether or not the remaining variation display time of the ordinary figure sub-variation is longer than the variation display time of the special figure sub-variation.

Here, FIG. 10 shows the fluctuation display time of the game times (general drawing sub fluctuation and general drawing main fluctuation) on the universal figure side and the fluctuation display time of game times (special figure sub fluctuation and special figure main fluctuation) on the special figure side. Referring again to, in the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time on the universal figure side selected in the variable display time table for universal figure when the reach is not generated (FIG. 10C) is all It is shorter than the variable display time on the special figure side selected in the special figure variable display time table (FIG. 10A). In other words, when the remaining variation display time of the general figure sub-variation is longer than the variation display time of the special figure sub-variation, it means that the game time on the general figure side is the game time at which the reach display occurs. When the remaining variation display time of the general figure sub-variation is shorter than the variation display time of the special figure sub-variation, it means that the game time on the general figure side is a game time in which the reach display does not occur.

When it is determined in step S1503 that the variation display time of the special figure sub-variation is longer than the remaining variation display time of the general figure sub-variation being executed, that is, the reach display does not occur for the game time on the general figure side being executed. In the case of the game time, extension processing of the variation display time of the universal figure sub variation is executed in step S1504. This process is a process of extending the variation display time of the game time being executed and ending the game time at the ending timing of the special figure main change. Specifically, in step S1503, with respect to the numerical information of the current elapsed counter, the time (period of time) obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time of the general drawing sub fluctuation from the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation (special chart main fluctuation). ), the process of adding numerical information corresponding to

For example, if the numerical information of the current elapsed counter corresponds to 2 sec, the 2 sec is the remaining variable display time of the general figure sub-variation. Since the variation display time of the special figure main variation (special figure sub-variation) in the low frequency support mode is 20 sec (see FIG. 10A), in this case, the variation display time of the game times being executed is this difference. A certain 18 seconds will be extended. In this case, the relationship between the general figure sub-variation and the special figure sub-variation is that the variation from the start to the timing at which the effect replacement process is performed in the game time is the general figure sub-variation, and this extended 18 sec The change is the special map sub-change.

After performing the process of step S1504, and after executing the symbol replacement process for each timing in step S1505, the main effect replacement process is ended.

In the symbol replacement process according to the timing, the symbol sequence to be symbol-replaced is determined according to the variation status of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 being executed on the symbol display device 42. In this case, by grasping the information of the elapsed counter for the general figure sub change and the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern determination process (step S1404) at the time of effect change in the effect figure determination process (FIG. 25), It is possible to grasp the change status of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3. Further, when replacing the symbols, the symbols after the replacement are determined based on whether or not it is a jackpot result, based on the type command received this time.

As described above, when the negative determination is made in step S1503, since the game time on the universal figure side being executed is a game time that does not correspond to the reach display, in the symbol replacement process according to the present timing, the symbol being changed at high speed The final stop symbol in the row is preferentially replaced so that the reach display is performed. If the reach display cannot be performed in such a process, the process for performing the reach display by changing the symbol sequence that is changing slowly or the symbol sequence that is stopped and displayed again at high speed is performed. To do.

In the process of replacing the final stop symbol during the high speed fluctuation again, the effect pattern table of FIG. 26 is referred to for determining the effect pattern after the symbol replacement. Specifically, it is specified which of the addresses As(1) to As(x) the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern determination process at the time of the change of the universal figure corresponds to, and the fluctuation received this time. The effect pattern of the special figure sub-variation corresponding to the command and the type command and the specified address is determined, and the final stop symbol is replaced. At the time of this replacement, the address As(n) in the effect table for time-varying figure change and the addresses Ap(m) to Ap(m+z) in the effect table for time-varying figure change are associated. Of the addresses Ap(m) to Ap(m+z), addresses Ap(r) to Ap(r+s) are set as addresses of effect patterns continuous from the effect pattern Ds(n) corresponding to As(n). Then, in the process of replacing the final stop symbol during the high speed fluctuation again, when the production pattern of the general figure sub fluctuation being executed is the address As(n), the fluctuation command and the type command received this time are referred to. An address 1 from the addresses Ap(r) to Ap(r+s) in the effect table for special figure change is determined, and the special figure sub-variation is executed in the effect pattern after the final stop symbol is replaced. By doing so, it becomes possible to associate the effect pattern before replacement and the effect pattern after replacement as a continuous effect.

It should be noted that, as described above, a configuration in which one address on the universal figure side is not associated with a plurality of addresses on the special figure side but may be associated one-to-one with each other.

Now, in the symbol replacement process by timing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed. If the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, the final stop symbol replacement processing in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S1602, and then this processing ends. In step S1602, the final stop symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 during high speed fluctuation is replaced so as to form a reach line with the upper symbol row Z1. Furthermore, the game result is grasped from the type command at the time of special figure fluctuation which is received this time, and the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 during high speed fluctuation is finally determined to be the game result at the time of special figure fluctuation. More specifically, if it is a jackpot result, the same symbol as the one forming the reach line is determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, and if it is a misalignment result, a symbol different from the symbol forming the reach line is determined. It is determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, referring to the addresses As(1) to As(x) in the effect table of the universal figure sub-variation as described above, the effect pattern after the final stop symbol is replaced is determined. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 is executed in accordance with the effect pattern, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed.

Moreover, in step S1602, a production replacement command is output to the display control device 400. The production replacement command includes information that the production replacement will be performed, information of the final stop symbol after the replacement, and the production pattern after the replacement, and the display control device 400 is based on the received production replacement command. Then, a data table for performing the effect after replacement on the symbol display device 42 is read from the program ROM 403, and a drawing list is output to the VDP 405 at a predetermined image update timing according to the data table.

The case where the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed in step S1601 means that the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are already stopped and the reach line is not formed. In this case, it is determined in subsequent step S1603 whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed. If the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, the re-changing process of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is executed in the following step S1604. In this process, final stop symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are determined so that the reach line is formed after the re-change, and the effect pattern after the re-change is determined.

The effect pattern table of FIG. 26 is also referred to when determining the effect pattern after this re-change. Specifically, it is specified which of the addresses As(1) to As(x) the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern determination process at the time of the change of the universal figure corresponds to, and the fluctuation received this time. The effect pattern of the special figure sub-variation corresponding to the command and the type command and the specified address is determined, and the final stop symbol is replaced. As described above, the address As(n) in the effect table for changing the normal figure and the addresses Ap(m) to Ap(m+z) in the effect table for changing the special figure are associated with each other. Of the addresses Ap(m) to Ap(m+z), addresses Ap(t) to Ap(t+u) are set as addresses of effect patterns that are not continuous from the effect pattern Ds(n) corresponding to As(n). In step S1604, when the production pattern of the general figure sub variation being executed is the address As(n), the address 1 from the address Ap(t) to Ap(t+u) in the production table for special figure variation. Is determined, and the special figure sub-variation is executed in the effect pattern after the final stop symbol is replaced. By doing so, it becomes possible to associate the effect pattern before the replacement and the effect pattern after the replacement as a discontinuous effect (an effect different before and after the replacement). And by replacing with a different production pattern than before, it is possible that the player expects that a special production will be performed, that is, it will be a jackpot result, and it can raise the attention Becomes

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, there may be a case where the effect pattern is continuous with the effect pattern so far (step S1602) or a case where the effect pattern is different from the effect pattern so far. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performance and enhance the interest.

Furthermore, in step S1604, a re-variation command is output to the display control device 400 in order to cause the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that are changing slowly or are stopped to change again at high speed, and a sound effect when executing the changing again, etc. Is performed by controlling the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. The display control device 400 that has received the re-changing command reads a data table for re-changing the symbol row from the program ROM 403, and draws on the VDP 405 at a predetermined image update timing according to the data table. Output a list.

In a succeeding step S1605, a final stop symbol replacement process in the middle symbol column Z2 is executed. In this process, the game result is grasped from the type command at the time of special figure fluctuation received this time, and the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 during high speed fluctuation is finally determined to be the game result at the time of special figure fluctuation. To do. More specifically, if it is a jackpot result, the final stop symbol of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 determined in step S1604, that is, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is the final symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. If the result is a deviation, the symbol different from the symbol forming the reach line is determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 is executed according to the effect pattern for the reach generation, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed. In addition, in step S1605, an effect replacement command is output to the display control device 400. The process of the display control device 400 that receives the production replacement command is as already described. However, the effect pattern in this case is an effect pattern different from the effect patterns that have been determined so far by the re-variation process (step S1604). After the processing of step S1605 is executed, this processing ends.

If the medium symbol sequence Z2 is not changing at high speed but is changing at low speed or is stopped at step S1603, at step S1606, the process for re-changing processing of all symbol lines Z1 to Z3 is executed. This process is almost the same as the process of step S1604. That is, the final stop symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are determined so that the reach line is formed after the re-change, and the change command and the type for the special figure which is receiving the production pattern after the re-change this time. Make a decision based on the command. Then, in order to change the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 that are changing at a low speed or stopped at a high speed again, a re-changing command is output to the display control device 400, and an effect such as a sound effect when the re-changing is executed is displayed. This is performed by controlling the unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. The process of the display control device 400 that has received the re-changing command is as already described.

In a succeeding step S1607, a final stop symbol replacement process in the middle symbol column Z2 is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S1605. After the processing of step S1607 is executed, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of the effect replacement process (FIG. 26), if it is determined in step S1503 that the fluctuation display time of the general figure sub-variation being executed is longer than the fluctuation display time of the special figure sub-variation, the process proceeds to step S1506. Then, the processing for shortening the fluctuation display time of the general picture sub fluctuation is executed. This process is a process of shortening the variation display time of the game time being executed and ending the game time at the ending timing of the special figure main change. Specifically, in step S1506, the numerical information corresponding to the time (period) obtained by subtracting the fluctuation display time of the special figure sub fluctuation from the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal figure sub fluctuation is subtracted from the numerical information of the current elapsed counter. To execute the process.

For example, if the current numerical information of the elapsed counter corresponds to 36 sec, the 36 sec is the remaining variation display time of the general-use sub-variation. As described above, the variation display time of the special figure main variation (general figure sub-variation) in the low frequency support mode is 20 seconds, so in this case, the variation display time of the game times being executed is shortened by 16 seconds which is this difference. It will be. In this case, the relationship between the ordinary figure sub-variation and the special figure sub-variation is that the variation from the start to the timing at which the effect replacement process is performed in the relevant game time is the ordinary figure sub-variation, and the variation thereafter is special. It is a figure sub-variation.

Further, as described above, the case of making a positive determination in step S1503 means that the game time on the universal figure side is the game time at which the reach display is generated. In this case, since the reach display is occurring in the running figure sub-variation being executed, it is not necessary to replace the final stop symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 to form the reach line. Therefore, after the processing of step S1506 is executed, the final stop symbol replacement processing in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S1507, and then the main effect replacement processing is ended. The processing of step S1507 is the same as the processing of steps S1605 and S1607 described above. However, in this case, the effect pattern after the replacement of the final stop symbol is determined based on the effect pattern of the universal figure sub-variation being executed as in step S1607. Therefore, the production pattern of the reach display being executed is replaced with a continuous production pattern, and the reach display up to now is not wasted. After executing the process of step S1507, the effect replacement process is ended.

As described above, in the effect replacement process according to the present embodiment, depending on whether reach display can be executed, it is replaced with a continuous effect pattern, or an effect pattern different from the effect pattern being executed, that is, a discontinuous effect pattern. Replace the production so that. However, the mode of effect replacement is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a continuous effect pattern, the reach display may be performed by sliding or suddenly stopping the lower symbol row during low speed fluctuation, or already stopped. The reach display may be performed by replacing the present pattern with high-speed fluctuation, for example, while hiding it in smoke and replacing the design. In short, in the case of a continuous effect pattern, the effects before and after the replacement are in a continuous relationship (the same character continues the same appearance, the same story-like effect continues, and one effect before and after the replacement). There should be some kind of production). Further, in the case of a non-continuous effect pattern, it may be possible to develop into a super reach of animation or a moving image with the action of a movable accessory, or a so-called freeze effect may be achieved by blacking out the screen. In short, if the effect pattern is discontinuous, the effect before and after replacement may be discontinuous (the character appearing in the effect may be changed, the format may be changed, or different story-like effects may be performed). Good.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 25 ), if it is determined in step S1409 that the high frequency support mode is being used instead of the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1416. In step S1416, it is determined whether or not the universal figure main variation is being executed. As described above, the universal figure sub-variation is not performed during the high-frequency support mode, and the jackpot notification is performed only when shifting to the support execution mode. However, the MPU 302 of the sound/light control device 300 can grasp the period while the general-purpose main variation is executed. That is, when the numerical information of the above-mentioned elapsed counter to which the information of the fluctuation display time is input based on the reception of the fluctuation command and the type command at the time of fluctuation of the general figure is not 0, the main figure main fluctuation is executed. Understand as the period of time.

If the universal figure main variation is being executed, it is determined in step S1417 whether or not the universal figure main variation corresponds to the support winning. If it does not correspond to the support win, or if the ordinary figure main variation is not being executed in step S1416, it is determined in step S1418 whether or not this special figure variation corresponds to the jackpot result. To do. Specifically, the game result is grasped from the variation command and the type command at the time of the special figure variation received this time, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, jackpot notification processing is executed in step S1419.

After performing any one of step S1413, step S1415, and step S1419, after making an affirmative decision in step S1414 or step S1417, or after making a negative decision in step S1418, other processing is performed in step S1420. After that, the main effect determination process ends.

In the other processing of step S1420, the processing for executing the ceiling advance notice effect based on the reception of the ceiling advance notice command and the reception of the opening command and ending command for the general figure and the special figure are used for the support winning. And the process for advancing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, also in the high frequency support mode, in the case where the universal figure main variation being executed corresponds to the support winning (step S1417: YES), the process for replacing the variation with the one based on the request for special figure special electric control (Steps S1418 and S1419) are not performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, regarding the relationship between the prizes for the through gates 35A and 35B (universal figure prize), the prizes for the working opening 34 and the special prize hole 52 (special figure prize), and the variable display based on these prizes. And explain.

First, when a universal figure winning a prize occurs at the timing of t1, the regular figure main change in the regular figure display unit 39 and the general figure sub-variation in the symbol display device 42 are started. As described above, these variation display times are determined in step S510 of the universal figure variation start processing (FIG. 16), and at the timing of t2, which is the elapsed timing of the variation display time, the general figure main variation and the universal figure. The sub fluctuation ends. In this case, the effects of the main figure main variation and the general figure sub variation correspond to the game result based on the universal figure winning prize. For example, if the game result is a support win, the mode shifts to the support execution mode. Opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34a is started.

When the special figure prize is generated at the timing of t4, which is during the fluctuation of the main figure main fluctuation and the general figure sub fluctuation started at the timing of t3, and the special figure main fluctuation based on the special map prize (special figure sub If the variation display time (TA1) of (variation) is longer than the remaining variation display time (TA2) of the general figure sub-variation, the variation display time extension process of the general figure sub-variation currently being executed is performed. As a result, even if the universal figure main variation ends at the timing of t5, the universal figure sub variation does not end. Then, the ordinary figure sub-variation ends at the timing of t6 when the special figure main variation ends. In this case, as described above, the effect of the normal figure sub-variation basically ends in a state where the effect corresponding to the game result based on the special figure winning is replaced. Then, for example, when the game result based on the special figure winning a prize is a big hit result, the opening/closing execution mode is entered and the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 is started.

When the special figure prize is generated at the timing of t8, which is the fluctuation of the main figure main fluctuation and the general figure sub fluctuation started at the timing of t7, and the special figure main fluctuation based on the special map prize (special figure sub When the fluctuation display time (TA3) of (variation) is shorter than the remaining fluctuation display time (TA4) of the general figure sub fluctuation, the fluctuation display time of the general figure sub fluctuation currently being executed is shortened. As a result, when the special figure main fluctuation ends at the timing of t9, the general figure main fluctuation does not end, but the general figure sub fluctuation ends. In this case, as described above, the effect of the normal figure sub-variation basically ends in a state where the effect corresponding to the game result based on the special figure winning is replaced. Then, for example, when the game result based on the special figure winning a prize is a big hit result, the opening/closing execution mode is entered and the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 is started. On the other hand, the general figure sub-variation ends at the timing of t10, which is the timing of the variation display time determined at the start of the variation at t7.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 52, a lottery for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode (the winning/losing determination processing on the special map side) is performed, and a game rendition corresponding to the winning/winning lottery is displayed as a symbol. In the configuration performed by the device 42, a part of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35A is configured to win the special winning opening 52, and the symbol display device 42 is also displayed based on the winning of the through gate 35A. It is configured to produce a game replay. As a result, even during the period when the special winning opening 52 is not won (the general winning opening 53 is won), it is as if the player is being drawn to the open/close execution mode. Can be shown to. However, in such a configuration, in the sound and light control device 300, when the winning of the special winning opening 52 occurs during the game rendition based on the winning of the through gate 35A. Requests for symbol variations for performing game diversion will be duplicated. Therefore, in such a case, the effect replacement process (FIG. 26) is configured to replace the effect of the game with the one corresponding to the winning of the special winning opening 52, thereby eliminating the inconvenience in the case of overlapping and playing the game. It is possible to favorably raise the degree of attention.

In particular, in the configuration in which the special figure main variation and the ordinary figure main variation are performed in the lottery result display portion 37, and the game display effect (special figure sub variation and ordinary figure sub variation) is further performed in the symbol display device 42. The transition to the open/close execution mode and the transition to the support execution mode are made at the end timing of the variable display by the lottery result display unit 37. Therefore, in the case of effect replacement as described above, if the end timing of the effect for game use on the side of the symbol display device 42 and the timing of transition to the opening/closing execution mode or support execution mode do not match, Inconvenience may occur. That is, for example, if the timing of stopping the lottery result display unit 37 is too early with respect to the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side, for the player who is looking at not only the lottery result display unit 37 but also the symbol display device 42 There is a risk of frustration that the transition to the execution mode or the support execution mode is not displayed. On the other hand, if the finish timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side is too early with respect to the stop timing of the lottery result display section 37, before the stop of the lottery result display section 37, the opening/closing execution mode or the support execution mode is changed. There is a risk that the transition is known and the interest in viewing the effect on the symbol display device 42 side is distracting.

Further, in such a configuration, the managers of the gaming halls generally confirm the lottery result display section 37 side to confirm that the win/win lottery has been performed and the result thereof, and thus determine the win/win lottery. It is considered to confirm whether or not an illegal act such as shifting to the open/close execution mode or the support execution mode is performed without being based. Therefore, by matching the timing of transition to the open/close execution mode or the support execution mode with the stop timing of the variable display on the lottery result display unit 37, it becomes possible to easily detect the above-mentioned misconduct.

As a specific configuration described above, a gaming ball that has won the through gate 35A is sure to enter the special accessory 33, and the special prize 33 can be prized to the special winning opening 52 by the distribution plate 54. It is configured to be divided into one passage 51a and a second passage 51b in which a special winning opening 52 cannot be won.

Then, the variable display time of the game times based on the winning of the through-gate 35A is passed from passing through the through-gate 35A to passing through the first passage 51a of the special accessory 33 and winning the special winning opening 52. The time was set longer than expected. As a result, when the effect for game play (special figure sub-variation) based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 is replaced from the effect for game turn (general figure sub-variation) based on the winning of the through gate 35A, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the effect for game use based on the winning of the through-gate 35A has ended.

That is, with the above configuration, the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, and then the game ball wins the special winning opening 52. However, the game time based on the winning of the through gate 35A When the variable display time is shorter than the period required for passing the above, the production for game play is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35A, and the game ball is to win the special winning opening 52. Based on the above, another game diversion effect will be started. Therefore, a single game ball will flow down and a plurality of game times will be played, which may give a player a feeling of strangeness. On the other hand, as described above, when the variation display time of the game times based on the winning in the through gate 35A is set to be longer than the period required for passing, the special winning opening 52 is won, to the through gate 35A. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the game is played based on the winning of, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the above-mentioned strange feeling.

However, when a prize for the through gate 35A is further generated during execution of the game replay effect based on the prize for the through gate 35A, and the prize corresponds to the ceiling, the above-mentioned game being executed. There is a possibility that the special winning opening 52 will be won after the end of the round. Therefore, in this case, it is configured to start the game reproducibility based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 (steps S1410 to S1413). As a result, it is possible to avoid the event that the game time corresponding to the ceiling is not performed.

In such a configuration, in the case of exchanging the effect for the game time, depending on the length of the variable display time of the game time based on the winning at the special winning opening 52, (the winning in the through gate 35A (Based) It is configured to extend or shorten the variation display time of the game times. Thereby, the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the variation display time of the game times based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 and the ending timing of the effect for the game times on the symbol display device 42 side are matched. Is possible.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35A, it is configured to perform a lottery for transitioning to the support execution mode (whether or not to determine whether or not the game is on the universal figure side). Made the contents compatible with the transfer lottery. As a result, even in the case of the game replay based on the winning of the through gate 35A without the lottery for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the degree of attention can be increased.

In particular, in the present embodiment, by shifting to the support execution mode, winning in the operating port 34 is allowed, and based on the winning in the operating port 34, switching to the opening/closing execution mode is performed with a probability of almost 100%. Therefore, it is possible to substantially change the transition lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35A to the opening/closing execution mode, and to produce the game for playing through the winning of either the through gate 35A or the special winning opening 52. No matter what, the player can be noticed without any difference.

When the lottery result of the transition lottery performed based on the winning at the through gate 35 is the support winning result, the lottery result of the transition lottery performed based on the winning at the special winning opening 52 is the jackpot result. Similarly, the same symbol combination is formed and stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 42. With this configuration, if you have won the lottery for transition to the support execution mode and have not won the lottery for transition to the open/close execution mode, and if you have won the lottery for transition to the support execution mode. No, and if you have won the transition lottery to open/close execution mode, and if you have won any transition lottery, both are displayed as the same stop result, so the same in the game times. Eliminates the inconvenience that no state transitions even though a combination of symbols is formed and stopped and displayed, and in addition, in each of the above cases, the game is complicated due to replacement of the stop display. Never.

As described above, the result of the transfer lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35A is a normal figure, while the structure for performing the game replay is performed on the side of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning of the through gate 35A and the special winning opening 52. The result of the transfer lottery displayed on the display unit 39 and based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 is displayed on the special figure display unit 38. Therefore, while exhibiting the above-mentioned effects, the manager of the game hall or the like can check the respective display sections 38 and 39 to grasp that each transfer lottery has been conducted and the result of the lottery. You can

In the effect replacement process (FIG. 27), the final stop symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are replaced, and the reach display is performed thereafter. That is, the effect is replaced so that the effect pattern is continuous from the effect pattern being executed. As a result, the effect of the normal figure sub-variation that has been performed so far is not wasted, and it is possible to reduce the player's feeling that the effect so far is useless. Further, by doing this, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when the replacement is performed.

Further, in the symbol replacement process (FIG. 28) for each timing in the effect replacement process, the variation status of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is grasped, and if all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are varying, all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The final stop symbol is replaced, and if any of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped, the symbol column is changed again. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the reach line is not formed at the time of replacement and the reach display cannot be performed.

In the special accessory 33 provided in the game area PE, in the game ball passage area R from the ball passage opening 33a to the special winning opening 52, the game balls that have passed through the ball passage opening 33a are provided in the first passage 51a (special winning opening). Since there are 8 (upper and lower 8 steps) distribution plates 54 for allocating to either the 52) or the second passage 51b (the passage where the special winning opening 52 cannot be won). Even if the game balls have passed through the ball passage port 33a, not all of them enter the special winning opening 52, and only when the game balls are distributed to the first passage 51a side by each distribution plate 54, the special winning combination. A prize is given to the mouth 52. In particular, each distribution plate 54 changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on the arrival of the game ball that has passed through the ball passage port 33a, and that a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passage port 33a. Along with this, the game ball is shifted to the special winning opening 52. That is, in order to win the game balls into the special winning opening 52 and obtain a predetermined privilege, it is a condition that a predetermined number of the game balls are passed through the ball passage opening 33a. In this case, it is considered that the player playing the pachinko machine 10 positively continues the game with the expectation that some benefit will be obtained by passing a predetermined number of game balls through the ball passage opening 33a. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game.

The special accessory 33 has an eight-stage distribution plate 54 from the upstream side to the downstream side in the game ball passage area R, and these eight-stage distribution plate 54 is a game in the front distribution plate 54 among them. When the balls are distributed to the first passage 51a side, the game balls are arranged so as to reach the distribution plate 54 in the subsequent stage. When the number of game balls passing through the ball passage port 33a reaches a predetermined number (256 in this embodiment), the distribution destinations of the game balls for the eight distribution plates 54 are all on the side of the first passage 51a, and the game is played. The ball shifts to a state of winning in the special winning opening 52. In this case, the distribution plates 54 of the respective stages are arranged to alternately change the distribution destinations on the first passage 51a side and the second passage 51b side each time a game ball arrives. Therefore, in order to change the number of game balls (that is, the number of balls required for winning the special winning opening 52) required to set all the distribution destinations of each distribution plate 54 to the first passage 51a side, the distribution plate 54 is changed. It suffices to change the number of installation stages of, and it is possible to easily carry out a design change related to winning in the special winning opening 52. For example, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to make it difficult to acquire the privilege (reduce the chance of winning the special winning opening 52), the number of stages of the distribution plate 54 is increased to facilitate the acquisition of the privilege (to the special winning opening 52). In order to increase the number of winning opportunities), it is advisable to reduce the number of installation stages of the distribution plate 54.

Each distribution plate 54 is an oscillating body pivotably supported in the game ball passage area R, and swings when the game ball hits when passing the game ball to switch the distribution destination of the game ball. Is. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution plate 54 is not determined by electrical processing, there is no need for arithmetic processing for switching the distribution destination, and power consumption does not occur during distribution. In addition, since it is not affected by an electrical signal, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an unauthorized electrical signal.

The special accessory 33 has a special winning opening 52 in which a lottery process for awarding a game ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 33a (a game ball that has entered the special accessory 33) is executed in association with the winning of the game ball. The lottery process is to be distributed to any of the general winning openings 53 for which the lottery process is not executed. According to this configuration, when the game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, a prize is generated in any of the winning ports 52 and 53, and the payout of the game ball can be expected with the winning. That is, for the player, some advantage is brought by the game ball passing through the ball passage port 33a. Partly because of this, the player is prompted to operate the launching device aiming at the passage of the game ball through the ball passage opening 33a, and as a result, the number of balls passing through the ball passage opening 33a increases and the special prize. The chances of winning the prize in the mouth 52 are increased.

Since the winning probability of the lottery process executed when the game ball wins the special winning opening 52 is 100%, the player has a high probability as the predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passing opening 33a. You can get benefits at. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game.

The winning probability of the lottery process may be 50% or more, and may be changed to a probability other than 100% such as 50% and 80%.

The game area PE is provided with an operating port 34 as a winning portion for performing the same lottery process (lottery process regarding the opening/closing execution mode) as when the special prize hole 52 is won. In this case, even before a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the ball passage port 33a, that is, before the game ball has won the special winning port 52, the game ball has won the operating port 34. Since the lottery process is executed by, the player in the game can be given another chance to win. For example, immediately after the number of balls passing through the ball passage opening 33a reaches a predetermined number and the lottery process is performed, there is a time gap before the next lottery process, which discourages the player's motivation to continue the game. However, if the lottery process is performed by winning the prize in the operation opening 34 as described above, it is possible to keep the expectation of winning at any time and encourage the player to continue the game. It becomes possible.

In the game area PE, a through gate 35A is provided immediately above the ball passage opening 33a which is the entrance of the special accessory 33, and the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a immediately after passing through the through gate 35A. Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a and wins the special winning opening 52, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the player is given the first privilege (game privilege in the opening/closing execution mode). Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, whether or not to give the second benefit (game privilege in the support execution mode) to the player is selected by lottery. In this case, when the player shoots a game ball aiming at the ball passage opening 33a, it also aims at the through gate 35A at the same time. In this case, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, the lottery process for the second benefit is performed. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passing port 33a following the through gate 35A, if the number of ball passing at the ball passing port 33a reaches a predetermined number, the game ball wins the special winning opening 52, 2 The lottery process for the benefits is performed. Here, for the player, the passage of the game ball through each of the above-mentioned passage portions (through gate 35A, ball passage opening 33a) increases the opportunity to obtain not only the second benefit but also the first benefit, and the desire to continue the game. Will increase.

At the time of winning the ball passing opening 33a or the special winning opening 52, the first effect (special figure sub-variation) determined based on the lottery result of the first privilege (game privilege in the opening/closing execution mode), and when passing through the through gate 35A Both the second effect (universal figure sub-variation) determined based on the lottery result of the second benefit (game privilege in the support execution mode) is configured to be implemented by the symbol display device 42. In this case, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the effect is for the first benefit or the second benefit while the effect is being displayed by the symbol display device 42. Therefore, interest in the effect of the symbol display device 42 can be increased.

The first effect and the second effect include the same effect form. In other words, in the symbol display device 42, the display effect with the same background, the same character picture, and the same character pattern is performed. For example, when the variation symbol is changed in the symbol display device 42, the same variation symbol is changed in both the first effect and the second effect, and only the final fixed symbol is used for the first effect. It is recommended to use the design, the design for the second effect. As a result, it becomes more difficult to determine which of the first effect and the second effect is being performed, and it is possible to increase interest in the result of the effect.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, the game ball is also put into the special accessory 33 immediately after that, and the inside of the special accessory 33 is not visible. Has become. Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether the effect this time is based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 or the ball passing through the through gate 35A, and it is possible to further raise the degree of attention of the player in giving the privilege.

The expected number of prize balls is set to be larger for the first privilege (game privilege in the opening/closing execution mode) than in the second privilege (game privilege in the support execution mode). In this case, the player plays the game with the expectation that the first privilege with a large expected number of prize balls will be generated, but cannot recognize which effect process of the first privilege and the second privilege is currently being executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the lottery result by making the player expect the first benefit to occur.

In the general/universal/general electric power control process, it is determined that the special character/special electric power counter is “0”, that is, the game time based on the special character special electric power control process is not executed in the symbol display device 42. That is, the execution status of the special figure special electric control is monitored in the general figure normal electric control process. Then, when the symbol variation in the symbol display device 42 occurs as the special symbol special power control process, the symbol variation in the symbol display device 42 is not started as the universal symbol normal power control process. As a result, in the configuration in which the symbol variation based on the special figure special electric control process and the symbol variation based on the special figure special electric control process are carried out by the same symbol display device 42, the symbol variation by the special figure special electric control is halfway. It is possible to suppress the interruption due to, and it is possible to carry out the symbol display without a feeling of strangeness. Therefore, even if the lottery for the first benefit and the lottery for the second benefit occur at random, it is possible to perform an appropriate display effect on the symbol display device 42.

A cover member 60 that covers each distribution plate 54 from the front of the gaming machine in the special accessory 33 is provided, and each distribution plate 54 is invisible to the player by the cover member 60. In this case, whether the distribution plate 54 is assigned to the first passage 51a (the passage where the special winning opening 52 can be won) or the second passage 51b (the passage where the special winning opening 52 cannot be won) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not Further, the player cannot visually recognize each distribution plate 54, but it is possible to recognize the existence of each distribution plate 54 by the cover member 60 provided in the game area PE, and It is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the distribution is performed.

In the process of the number of balls passing through the ball passing port 33a approaching a predetermined number (=256), when the number of passing balls reaches a predetermined intermediate number (=251) smaller than the predetermined number, the intermediate number is reached. Is configured to execute a notification process for notifying the player of the arrival of. In this case, the player can easily understand how much the game ball will win in the special winning opening 52 in the future, and the expectation degree for the winning can be increased. This also makes it possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

<Second Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration in which the universal figure sub-variation is replaced when the ceiling is reached. Specifically, by using the first universal figure prize winning counter, when the ceiling reaches the ceiling, the universal figure sub-variation is replaced with a production corresponding to the ceiling in advance at the start of the universal figure sub-variation, and is also replaced. The variation display time of the special figure main variation at the ceiling is determined so as to correspond to the variation display time of the general figure sub variation. The detailed processing configuration will be described below.

<Purchase side hold information acquisition process>
First, the process of acquiring reservation information on the universal figure side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process of FIG. 30 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, as in steps S401 to S409 of the first embodiment, in steps S1701 to S1709, counters C4, C5, CS2 for general drawings based on the winning of the through gates 35A, 35B. Storage processing and ceiling announcement processing are executed. Further, in step S1710, as in step S410, it is determined whether the first universal figure winning award counter is “256” to determine whether the number of times the special accessory 33 has entered the ceiling. judge. If the ceiling has not been reached, the main acquisition processing is ended as it is.

When the ceiling is reached, it is determined in the next step S1711 whether or not the universal figure/universal electric power counter is “0”, and it is determined whether or not the general/universal figure main variation is in a variable display state. If the universal figure/genuine counter is not “0” (variable main figure variation is being displayed), a process of setting “1” to the ceiling replacement flag provided in the RAM 84 in subsequent step S1712 is executed. Execute. The ceiling replacement flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify that the currently-executed universal figure sub-variation is replaced with an effect corresponding to the ceiling.

In a succeeding step S1713, the ceiling replacement command is set as an output target to the sound/light control device 300. The process of the sound and light control device 300 based on the reception of the ceiling replacement command will be described in detail later.

When a negative determination is made in step S1711, or after the process of step S1713 is executed, a process of setting "1" to the ceiling flag provided in the RAM 84 is executed in step S1714. The ceiling flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify that the number of game balls entering the special accessory 33 has reached the ceiling of 256 times. Then, the ceiling flag is erased when it is determined in step S701 that the final stop time has elapsed in the process of confirming the universal figure (FIG. 18).

In the following step S1715, the first universal figure winning award counter is cleared as in step S411, and then the present acquisition processing is ended.

<Universal figure fluctuation start processing>
Next, the universal figure fluctuation start process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the process of FIG. 31A is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, similar to the processing of steps S501 to S509 in the first embodiment, the support mode transition processing and the hit/miss determination processing corresponding to the support mode are executed in steps S1801 to S1809.

In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the ceiling flag is set to "1". If not set, normal variable display time and stop result grasping processing is executed in step S1811. The process of step S1811 is similar to the process of step S510.

If "1" is set in the ceiling flag in step S1810, a process of grasping the ceiling variable display time and the stop result is executed in step S1812. In this processing, the fluctuation display time table for the general figure at the time of the ceiling is read out, and the fluctuation display times of the main figure main fluctuation and the general figure sub fluctuation this time are determined. In the general-purpose variable display time table for the ceiling, as shown in FIG. 31B, the single variable display time is displayed regardless of the numerical information of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. In addition, the variable display time is a time period that is expected to be required for winning the special winning opening 52 after the game ball passes through the through gate 35A (for example, 10 seconds), after the special winning opening 52 is won, the symbol is displayed. The time is a time added with the time required to execute the effect for the big hit in the device 42, and is specifically 42 seconds, for example. On the other hand, in the stop result grasping process, the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit/miss judgment process (step S1809) on the universal figure side this time is grasped.

After executing the processing of step S1811 or step S1812, in step S1813, the normal variation display time grasped in step S1811, or the ceiling variation display time grasped in step S1812 Execute the process of setting in the counter. The processing of the subsequent steps S1814-1817 is the same as the processing of steps S512-S515. However, in the present embodiment, when the variation command and the classification command for general drawings are set as output targets in step S1815, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ceiling flag, and the ceiling flag is set. If it is, that is, if the universal figure sub-variation to be started this time is the universal figure sub-variation at the time of ceiling, the information corresponding to the jackpot result regardless of the result determination result on the universal figure side and the information set in step S1812 above are set. The variable display time information is set to be included. Then, in the fluctuation display start process of step S1816, the fluctuation display is started so that the stop result in the normal figure main fluctuation becomes the stop result grasped in step S1811 or step S1812. After executing the processing of step S1817, the general-universal-picture variation start processing ends.

<Processing during changes in the universal map>
Next, the universal figure changing process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the process of FIG. 32 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, similar to steps S601 to S604 in the first embodiment, the processing for updating the public figure display unit 39 is executed in steps S1901 to S1904. Further, when the variable display time has elapsed in step S1901, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the special figure special power counter is “0” as in step S605.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1905, in the present embodiment, it is decided in step S1906 whether or not the ceiling replacement flag is set to "1". Set the final stop command of to the output target.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, or after the processing of step S1907 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1908. The processes of steps S1908 to S1911 are the same as the processes of steps S607 to S610. After the process of step S1911 is executed, the process of changing the normal figure ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of winnings to the through gate 35A reaches the ceiling, if the universal figure sub-variation has not been performed, the universal figure sub-variation based on the hold information acquired each time the ceiling is reached is changed. The game times corresponding to the ceiling are executed. Specifically, a long variation display time is set in advance in the universal figure sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling (steps S1812 and S1813), and an effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed in advance (step S1815).

In other words, in the present embodiment, when it is predicted that the request for the pattern variation based on the general/universal electric power control and the request for the symbol variation based on the special electric power/special electric power control are overlapped at the time of the ceiling, the general/universal electric power is previously set. The request for the symbol variation based on the power control is made to be a request corresponding to the request for the symbol variation based on the special figure special power control. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the possibility that it is necessary to perform the process of changing the variable display time or replacing the effect after the overlapping of the request for the symbol variation occurs. The structure can be simplified.

In addition, it is assumed that the request for the symbol variation based on the universal figure/universal electric control is a request corresponding to the request for the symbol variation based on the special figure/special electric control in advance, and actually corresponds to the request for the symbol variation based on the special figure/special electric control. If they are different (that is, if the judgment result on the special map side is a result of a failure), then a process is performed in which the production is replaced with that corresponding to the request for the symbol variation based on the actual special map special electric control. Be seen. Although such processing will be described later, even in this case, at least the change display time is not changed, and therefore, the change display is performed at the time when the overlapping of the request for the change of symbols occurs as in the first embodiment. The processing configuration is simplified as compared with the configuration of changing the time and replacing the effect.

Further, if the general figure sub-variation is performed, the effect corresponding to the ceiling is performed in the general figure sub-variation currently being executed, as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the final stop command is not output so as not to stop the currently-executed universal figure sub-variation. By doing so, when the general figure sub-variation based on the winning of the through gate 35A is being executed and the winning of the through gate 35A occurs and the winning corresponds to the ceiling, the special winning opening It is possible to avoid the event that the above-mentioned universal figure sub-variation that has been executed at the time of winning the prize at 52 has ended. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the processing (step S1410 to step S1413) in the case of occurrence of such an event as in the first embodiment, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

<Acquisition information setting process>
Next, the special figure acquisition information setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the process of FIG. 33 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG. 23.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether the high frequency flag is "0" to determine whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. If the low frequency support mode is in effect (high frequency flag=0), in step S2002, the normal/universal figure main variation is being executed by checking whether or not the normal/universal figure/universal counter is “0”. Or not. When the universal figure/genuine counter is not “0” and the universal figure main variation is being executed, it is determined in the following step S2003 whether or not the ceiling flag is set to “1”. If the ceiling flag is set to "1", it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the ceiling replacement flag is set to "1".

If "1" is not set in the ceiling replacement flag in step S2004, the remaining fluctuation display time of the general figure main fluctuation currently being executed is grasped in step S2005. In such a process, the remaining variation display time of the main figure main variation can be grasped by reading out the numerical information of the general figure universal communication timer counter.

If the high frequency support mode is in place of the low frequency support mode in step S2001, the general map main variation is not being executed in step S2002, and the ceiling flag is not set to "1" in step S2003. Alternatively, if "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag in step S2004, the variable display time corresponding to the current support mode is grasped in step S2006. This processing is the same as the processing relating to the grasp of the variable display time in step S1201.

After executing the processing of step S2005 or step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the special figure stop result is grasped. This processing is the same as the processing relating to the grasp of the stop result in step S1201. In a succeeding step S2008, a process of setting the remaining variation display time of the main figure main variation grasped in step S2005 or the variation display time corresponding to the current support mode grasped in step S2006 in the special figure special power timer counter is executed. ..

That is, when a prize is paid to the through gate 35A in a situation where the universal figure sub-variation is not performed and the prize corresponds to the ceiling, the universal figure variation start processing (FIG. 31) corresponds to the ceiling. The variable display time is set (steps S1812 and S1813). In this situation, when the winning game ball corresponding to the ceiling wins the special winning opening 52, the fluctuation display time of the special figure main fluctuation based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 corresponds to the ceiling. It is set to be the remaining variable display time of the general figure sub-variation (general figure main variation) set in the variable display time.

On the other hand, when a prize is paid to the through gate 35A in the situation where the universal figure sub-variation is performed and the prize corresponds to the ceiling, the acquisition process of the reserved information on the universal figure side (FIG. 30) Then, the ceiling replacement command is set as the output target so as not to end the currently-executed universal figure sub-variation (step S1713), and in the universal figure changing process (FIG. 32), the final stop command for the universal figure is output target. Is not set (step S1906: NO). In this situation, at the timing when the winning game ball corresponding to the ceiling wins the special winning opening 52, the general figure main fluctuation may have ended, but at least the general figure sub fluctuation has ended. Absent. In this case, the fluctuation display time of the special figure main fluctuation is set to be the fluctuation display time corresponding to the support mode. Then, on the sound and light control device 300 side as in the first embodiment, a process of matching the ending timing of the special figure main fluctuation with the ending timing of the game time on the symbol display device 42 side is performed.

In a succeeding step S2009, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode is being performed. If in the low frequency support mode, it is determined in the following step S2010 whether or not "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag. When "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag, the ceiling replacement flag is cleared to "0" in the following step S2011.

When the high frequency support mode is selected instead of the low frequency support mode in step S2009, or after the processing in step S2011 is executed, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets to the sound and light control device 300 in step S2012. Set.

Even when the ceiling replacement flag is not set to "1" even in the low frequency support mode in step S2010, or after the process of step S2012 is performed, the variable display of the special figure display unit 38 is displayed in step S2013. In step S2014, which is started, 1 is added to the numerical value information of the special drawing special electric power counter, and then the main acquisition information setting process is ended. The processes of steps S2013 and S2014 are the same as the processes of steps S1205 and S1206.

That is, in the present embodiment, the change command and the type command when the special figure changes are used to replace the effect of the general figure sub-change that is being executed in the low frequency support mode (when the ceiling replacement flag is set to “1”). (If present), it is transmitted to the sound/light control device 300.

In other words, in the low frequency support mode, if the normal figure sub-variation is not performed at the timing when the winning of the through gate 35A corresponding to the ceiling occurs, the variation command and the type command at the time of special figure variation are not output. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the win/no determination based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 is a failure result, in such a situation, the game times corresponding to the ceiling based on the winning of the through gate 35A, That is, the structure for the jackpot is performed.

This is because the winning probability on the special map side is set to almost 100%, and by doing so, the processing load can be reduced. However, for example, in the case of changing the winning probability on the special drawing side, it is preferable to replace the effect depending on the result of the lottery on the special drawing side at the time of ceiling.

<Production determination process executed by the sound/light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process by the MPU 302 of the sound/light control device 300 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 34. The process of FIG. 34 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command at the time of universal figure variation are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in a succeeding step S2102 whether or not the low frequency support mode is being performed, and in steps S2103 to S2107, the universal figure sub-variation is performed as in steps S1403 to S1407. Perform the process to start. In addition, in such a process, an effect pattern (an effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot result) in which the winning in the through gate 35A corresponds to the ceiling in the situation where the normal figure sub change is not performed is determined.

When a negative determination is made in step S2101 or step S2106, or after the processing of step S2105 or step S2107 is executed, it is determined in step S2108 whether or not the ceiling replacement command is received.

If the ceiling replacement command has been received, it is determined in the following step S2109 whether or not the universal figure sub-variation in execution corresponds to the support winning. If it does not, it proceeds to step S2110. To perform the effect replacement process. In such a process, a process for replacing the contents of the effect of the universal figure sub fluctuation determined and started in the processes of steps S2103 to S2105 as an effect corresponding to the ceiling with an effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, it is determined in step S2201 whether or not the upper symbol row Z1 is changing at high speed. The case where the upper symbol row Z1 is changing at a high speed means that none of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is still stopped, and in this case, in the subsequent step S2202, the finish restriction process is performed and then the production replacement is performed. The process ends. The end restriction process of step S2202 is a process of maintaining the state in which all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed without advancing the effect in the effect pattern determined in steps SS2103 to S2105.

When a negative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the lower symbol string Z3 is changing at high speed. When the negative determination is made in step S2201, and the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed in step S2202, it means that only the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped or changing at low speed, and in this case, step S2204. At, the process for re-changing the upper symbol row Z1 is executed, and after the end restriction process of step S2202 is executed, the main effect replacement process is ended. The process for re-changing the upper symbol sequence Z1 is the same as the process for the upper symbol sequence Z1 in step S1604.

When a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed. The high speed fluctuation in step S2205 means that the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped or the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at a low speed, and in this case, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are changed. The process for re-changing the symbol arrays Z1 and Z3 is executed, and after the end restriction process of step S2202 is executed, the main effect replacement process is ended. The process of step S2206 is the same as the process of step S1604.

If the middle symbol string Z2 is not changing at high speed in step S2205, the process for re-changing all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 is executed in step S2207, and the end restriction process in step S2202 is executed. The production replacement process ends. The process of step S2207 is the same as the process of step S1606.

That is, by receiving the ceiling replacement command, the fluctuation of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 in the currently-executed universal figure sub-variation is returned to the state of high speed variation, and the state of high speed variation is changed. Maintained. The state during the high speed change is canceled based on the fact that the change command and the type command at the time of special figure change are received thereafter based on the winning of the special winning opening 52.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 34), if the ceiling replacement command is not received in step S2108, if the universal figure sub-variation being executed in step S2109 corresponds to the support winning, or step After executing the process of S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command at the time of special figure variation are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in a succeeding step S2112 whether or not the low frequency support mode is being performed.

If it is in the low frequency support mode in step S2112, the general figure sub-variation during high speed change is changed to the change based on each command during special figure change based on each command during special figure change in subsequent step S2113. Execute the replacement process. Specifically, the effect pattern table for special figure sub-variation (FIG. 26 (b)) and each command received this time determines the subsequent effect of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are changing at high speed. In this case, whichever production pattern is selected in steps S2103 to S2105, the production replacement process (step S2110) is in the high-speed changing state, and thus is determined in the process of step S2113. The effect pattern is determined regardless of the effect pattern and the stop symbol determined in steps S2103 to S2105.

After the process of step S2113 is executed, in step S2114, the process of changing the variable display time of the universal figure sub-variation that is currently being executed is executed. In this processing, the numerical information of the elapsed counter is confirmed, and if it is 0, that is, although the fluctuation display time of the universal figure sub-variation input in step S2101 has already elapsed, the processing in step S2110 indicates that high-speed fluctuation is occurring. When the state is maintained, the process of adding the numerical information of the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation command received this time to the elapsed counter is executed. When the numerical information of the elapsed counter is not 0, that is, when the fluctuation display time of the universal figure sub fluctuation input in step S2101 has not yet elapsed, the same as the processing in step S1504 of FIG. 27. , The process of adding the numerical information corresponding to the time (period) obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time of the general figure sub fluctuation from the fluctuation display time of the special figure sub fluctuation to the numerical information of the current progress counter ..

On the other hand, when the high frequency support mode is selected instead of the low frequency support mode in step S2112, the processes of steps S2115 to S2118 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1416 to S1419.

If a negative determination is made in step S2111 or step S2117, an affirmative determination is made in step S2116, or after the processing of step S2114 or step S2118 is executed, other processing is executed in step S2119, and then the main effect determination is made. The process ends. The process of step S2119 is similar to the process of step S1420.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, regarding the relationship between the winning of the through gate 35A (general drawing prize), the winning of the special winning opening 52 (special drawing prize), and the variable display based on these winnings, in the present embodiment, explain.

When the winning to the through gate 35A which occurs at the timing of t1 which is the situation in which the general/universal side does not judge whether or not the ceiling corresponds to the ceiling, in the general/universal figure main fluctuation and the general/universal figure sub fluctuation, The corresponding variable display time (TB1) and stop result are determined. After that, when a prize is won at the special winning opening 52 at the timing of t2, the remaining fluctuation display time (TB2) of the ordinary figure main fluctuation started at the timing of t1 is changed to the fluctuation display time of the current special figure main fluctuation ( TB3) is set. As a result, the special figure main variation ends at the timing t3, which is the timing when the general figure main variation and the general figure sub variation end.

Here, when the value of the 1st universal figure prize counter reaches the ceiling price during execution of the universal figure sub-variation due to the previous universal figure winning, the universal figure sub-variation before reaching the ceiling has started. In addition, there is a possibility that the general-use figure sub-variation due to the arrival at the ceiling will not start, and the general-use figure sub-variation before the arrival at the ceiling will end before the special figure prize. In that respect, as described above, since the ceiling replacement flag is set to "1" (step S1712), the end of the universal figure sub-variation before reaching the ceiling is limited (step S1906: YES). It is possible to replace the ordinary figure sub-variation before arrival with a production corresponding to the ceiling.

That is, when the winning of the through-gate 35A generated at the timing of t5 corresponds to the ceiling during the fluctuation of the universal drawing main fluctuation triggered by the winning of the universal drawing at t4, if the winning at the through gate 35A corresponds to the ceiling, Although the reservation information is not acquired by passing through the through gate 35A, the effect corresponding to the ceiling is performed in the normal figure sub-variation started at the timing of t4. In this case, first, at the timing of t5, the ceiling replacement flag is set to "1", and the processing for controlling so as not to end the subsequent universal figure sub-variation is performed. Then, the final stop time (TB5) of the universal figure sub-variation started at the timing of t4 is determined with the winning of the special winning opening 52 occurring at the timing of t7 thereafter. As a result, the general figure main fluctuation ends at the timing of t6, but the general figure sub fluctuation does not end (replaced by the special figure sub fluctuation), and the game is played at the timing of t8 when the special figure main fluctuation ends. (The replaced special figure sub-variation) ends.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the special accessory 33, when the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the game ball reaches the ceiling and wins the special winning opening 52, it starts based on passing through the through gate 35A. It is configured to start the game reproduction effect as a game reproduction effect corresponding to winning the special winning opening 52. More specifically, when the ceiling flag is set in step S1810 in the universal figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 31), the variation display time for ceiling is grasped in step S1812 to determine the general figure sub-variation. It has a configuration to start. Normally, the presence/absence of the reach display in the universal figure sub-variation is determined independently of the value of the first universal symbol winning counter, but if the reach display does not occur in the universal figure sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling. If determined, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 may be stopped and displayed at the timing of winning the special winning opening 52 as in the first embodiment without the reach line being already formed. Can happen. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reach display is set to occur in the universal figure sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling, and the stop symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 during the transition is replaced. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly replace the game times corresponding to the ceiling, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player. However, in the case of this configuration, it is necessary to perform a process for grasping whether or not it corresponds to the ceiling that occurs only once every 256 times at the start of the general map sub fluctuation, so the processing load on the general map sub fluctuation side From the viewpoint of reducing the above, the first embodiment is more preferable.

Even with the configuration in which the universal figure sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling is set as described above, the following concerns may occur. That is, the first universal figure winning a prize counter is configured to be counted every time the passing through the through gate 35A occurs regardless of the number of times the universal figure sub-variation is executed. In addition, passage of the through gate 35A corresponding to the ceiling may occur. In such a case, a configuration may be considered in which the currently-executed universal figure sub-variation is ended and then the universal figure sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling is started. However, with this configuration, the timing of entering the special accessory 33 Therefore, there will be a difference in the timing of the start of the general sub-variation. As a result, the player recognizes that he/she has reached the ceiling at the time when the universal figure sub-variation is started without the ball entering the special accessory 33 after the ongoing universal figure sub-variation is completed. Will end up. In this case, the attention paid to the general-use sub-variation that is carried out will be reduced. Therefore, in such a case, a process is performed in which the general-use figure sub-variation that is being executed is replaced with the one that corresponds to the ceiling without ending the ongoing universal-use sub-variation. As a result, the ceiling function using the special accessory 33 can be suitably realized without lowering the degree of attention to the normal figure sub-variation.

By utilizing the fact that the variation display time of the general figure sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling is set to be long as described above, the variation on the special figure side executed based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 (special figure sub variation and The variation display time of the special figure main variation) is determined as the remaining variation display time of the general figure main variation at the timing of winning the special winning opening 52. As a result, in the normal figure sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling, it is not necessary to change the variable display time, and only the changing pattern needs to be replaced, and the processing load at the time of replacement can be reduced. Become. With this configuration, a deviation occurs between the end timing of the variation display (general figure sub variation and special figure sub variation) on the symbol display device 42 side in the game time corresponding to the ceiling and the transition timing to the opening/closing execution mode. Not only there, but also the variation display on the general figure display section 39 side (main figure variation), the variation display on the special figure display sections 38a and 38b (special figure main variation), and the variation display on the symbol display device 42 side ( It is possible to synchronize the end timing of the variable display of both the normal figure sub-variation and the special figure sub-variation), and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the number of reservations on the universal figure side is different from that in the first and second embodiments. Hereinafter, different configurations will be described.

First, the universal figure holding area 206 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

The universal figure holding area 206 includes a first area 206a, a second area 206b, a third area 206c and a fourth area 206d, and the universal random number counter C4, in accordance with the winning history to the through gates 35A and 35B. Numerical information of the second reach random number counter C5 and the second variation type counter CS2 is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d as reservation information on the universal figure side.

In this case, in the first area 206a to the fourth area 206d, when the winnings to the through gates 35A and 35B occur successively a plurality of times, the first area 206a→the second area 206b→the third area 206c→the third area 206c. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of four areas 206d. By providing the four areas 206a to 206d in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the through gates 35A and 35B can be reserved and stored up to a maximum of four.

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the universal figure reservation area 206 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be two, three, or five or more other numbers.

Further, in the universal figure holding area 206, an execution area 207 for universal figure is provided as in the first and second embodiments. The general-purpose execution area 207 is an area in which, when the variable display is started on the general-purpose display unit 39, hold information for a support determination target is stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the universal figure display unit 39 is started, the suspension information stored in the first area 206a of the universal figure suspension area 206 is moved to the execution area 207.

Although a detailed description is omitted with reference to the drawings, the game board 24 has a public figure reservation corresponding to the through gates 35A and 35B in an area visible to the player (specifically, a position adjacent to the general picture display portion 39). A display unit is provided. The universal figure holding display section is composed of, for example, an LED, and the number of holdings when a game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B is displayed by lighting the general figure holding display section. Specifically, when the number of reserved items is four, four universal figure reserved display parts are turned on, and when the number of reserved items is zero, zero universal figure hold display parts are illuminated. .. In addition, when changing the holdable number in the universal figure holding area 206 as described above, the number of the universal figure holding display section may be changed.

<Purchase side hold information acquisition process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38, a process of acquiring the reservation information on the universal figure side in the present embodiment will be described. Note that the process of FIG. 38 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, first, similarly to the processing of steps S401 to S405 (steps S1701 to S1705), the processing of steps S2301 to S2305 is executed.

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of the reservation information on the universal figure side stored in the universal figure reservation area 206 is less than 4, which is the upper limit. When the total number NS of the reservation information on the general figure side is less than 4, 1 is added to the total number NS of the reservation information on the general figure side in step S2307. In a succeeding step S2308, numerical value information of the universal random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5, and the second variation type counter CS2 is stored in the universal figure holding area 206.

When a negative determination is made in step S2306 or after the processing of step S2308 is executed, the processing relating to the ceiling notice is executed in steps S2309 and S2310. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps S408 and S409 (steps S1708 and S1709).

In a succeeding step S2311, the first universal prize winning counter is checked to determine whether or not the numerical information (256) corresponding to the ceiling. If the numerical information does not correspond to the ceiling, the main acquisition processing is directly performed. finish. If the numerical information corresponds to the ceiling, the process advances to step S2312.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of reservation information on the universal figure side is less than 4, which is the upper limit number. If it is less than 4, in step S2313, each numerical value in step S2308 is determined. The ceiling information is stored in the area where the information is stored. On the other hand, when the total number NS of the reservation information on the universal figure side is 4, which is the upper limit number, the ceiling information is stored in the fourth area 206d in step S2314.

After the processing of step S2313 or step S2314 is executed, the first universal figure winning combination counter is cleared in step S2315, and then the main acquisition processing is ended.

<Universal figure fluctuation start processing>
Next, the universal figure fluctuation start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the process of FIG. 39(a) is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

The universal figure fluctuation start process in the present embodiment has substantially the same processing configuration as the universal figure fluctuation start process in the second embodiment. Specifically, first, similarly to the processing in steps S1801 to S1804, the processing in steps S2401 to S2404 is executed.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of pieces of reservation information on the universal figure side is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, data setting processing is executed in subsequent step S2406.

In the data setting process, the total number NS of the reservation information on the universal figure side is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first area 206a of the universal figure reservation area 206 (that is, the reservation information) is moved to the execution area 207. After that, the shift processing of the universal figure holding area 206 is executed. In the shift process, the reservation information stored in the first area 206a of the universal figure reservation area 206 is cleared, and the second area 206b→the first area 206a, the third area 206c→the second area 206b, and the fourth area. The reservation information in each area is shifted such as 206d→third area 206c. In these processes, the ceiling information stored in step S2313 or step S2314 is also shifted like the hold information.

The processing of steps S2407 to S2418 is the same as the processing of steps S1806 to S1817 in the second embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, in step S2411, by determining whether or not the ceiling flag is included in the information moved to the execution area 207 for a general figure instead of the ceiling flag, it is determined that Check whether the fluctuation corresponds to the ceiling.

Note that, also in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39B, the general-purpose variable display time table at the time of ceiling has a single variable display time.

<Acquisition information setting process>
Next, the special figure side acquisition information setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the process of FIG. 40 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG. 23.

First, in step S2501, the high frequency flag is checked to determine whether the low frequency support mode is set. In a succeeding step S2502, it is determined whether or not the universal figure main change is being executed by confirming whether or not the universal figure/genuine counter is “0”. When the universal figure/genuine counter is not “0” and the universal figure main variation is being executed, it is determined in next step S2503 whether ceiling information is stored in the execution area 207. It is determined whether or not the effect corresponding to the ceiling should be executed in the normal figure sub-variation being executed. If the execution area 207 has ceiling information, in step S2504, the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal figure main fluctuation being executed is grasped. This process is similar to the process of step S2005 in FIG.

If the ceiling information does not exist in the execution area 207 in step S2503, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the ceiling information is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d of the universal figure holding area 206. If the ceiling information is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d, in the subsequent step S2506, the variable display time of the hold information of each area from the first area 206a to the area where the ceiling information is stored is grasped. To do. In such processing, it is possible to grasp the information of the variable display time of each area by using the numerical information of the second variation type counter CS2 of each area and the general-use variable display time table in the low frequency support mode. In the following step S2507, similarly to step S2504, the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal figure main fluctuation being executed is grasped.

If the high frequency support mode is selected instead of the low frequency support mode in step S2501, if the general figure main variation is not being executed in step S2502, or in any of the general figure holding areas 206 206a to 206d in step S2505. If the ceiling information is not stored, the variable display time corresponding to the support mode is grasped in step S2508.

After executing any one of step S2504, step S2507, and step S2508, the special figure stop result is grasped in step S2509. In subsequent step S2510, a process of setting the variable display time grasped in step S2504, step S2506 and step S2507, or step S2508 to the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed. That is, in step S2510, the remaining fluctuation display time of the main figure main fluctuation grasped in step S2504 or the fluctuation display time of each area 206a to 206d grasped in step S2506 and the general figure main fluctuation grasped in step S2507. Either the total of the remaining variable display time of (1) or the variable display time corresponding to the support mode grasped in step S2508 is set in the special figure special power timer counter.

In a succeeding step S2511, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode is set. If the low frequency support mode is not the high frequency support mode, in step S2512, the variation command and the type command are set to the sound and light control device 300. Set as an output target to. If the low frequency support mode is set in step S2511, or after the process of step S2512 is executed, the variable display (special map main fluctuation) of the special figure display unit 38 is started in step S2513, and the special display is performed in step S2514. The acquisition information setting process is terminated after adding 1 to the figure special power counter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation command and the type command at the time of special figure variation are not output during the low frequency support mode. Such a configuration is the same as the processing at the time of ceiling except the situation where the ceiling replacement command is output in the second embodiment. That is, also in the present embodiment, in the effect on the side of the symbol display device 42 corresponding to the ceiling, an effect corresponding to the ceiling (effect for the big hit result) is performed regardless of the result of the hit/miss judgment on the special drawing side.

<Production determination process executed by the sound/light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41. Note that the process of FIG. 41 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG. 25.

In this embodiment, the processes of steps S2601 to S2607 are executed in the same manner as steps S1401 to S14107.

In step S2608, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command at the time of special figure variation are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the low frequency support mode is set. If it is not the low frequency support mode, the same processing as steps S1416 to S1419 is performed in steps S2610 to S2613.

If the high frequency support mode is used instead of the low frequency support mode in step S2609, an affirmative determination is made in step S2611, a negative determination is made in step S2612, or after the processing of step S2613 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2614. And other processing is executed, and then the main effect determination processing is ended.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, by making it possible to store the hold information separately from the execution area 207 for the general figure in the general figure reservation area 206, the effect replacement at the time of ceiling in the second embodiment occurs. Absent. As a result, it becomes possible to realize smooth progress of the game by making it possible to store the hold information, and to reduce the storage capacity by simplifying the processing configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the game board 24 is different from that of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the above-described first to third embodiments, the winning-and-defective determination on the special drawing side is configured to be triggered by winning the special winning opening 52 or the working opening 34, but this is changed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the operation port 34 is not provided, and as the winning port for winning in the special accessory 33 other than during the ceiling, the winning port on the special drawing side (in place of the general winning port 53). Is provided. That is, the game ball that has entered the special accessory 33 wins either the special winning opening 52 or the special winning opening provided on the special drawing side, and whether or not the special drawing is winning is determined. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 224 in this embodiment will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the game board 224 of the present embodiment, the through gate 35B is not provided in the right side area PE3, but only the through gate 35A in the left side area PE2. The through gate 35A is provided right above the ball passage opening 33a in the special accessory 33, as in the first to third embodiments, and all the game balls winning the through gate 35A are the special accessory 33. To enter.

As shown in FIGS. 42(b) and 42(c), the through-gate 35A is provided with a universal utility article 35d as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The general electric utility article 35d is connected to a general electric drive unit (not shown) mounted on the back side of the game board 224, and the general electric object 35d is connected by the general electric drive unit (not shown). It is driven and the game ball shown in FIG. 42(b) is in an easily guided state (support state or guide state) and the non-guided state in which the game ball is harder to enter than in the guided state shown in FIG. 42(c) ( It is placed in either an unsupported state or a non-guided state.

When the general utility object 35d is placed in a non-guided state, both guide pieces stand upright so as to be parallel to the ball passage hole penetrating in the through gate 35A in the vertical direction, and from directly above the through gate 35A. Only the falling game balls can win the through gate 35A. Further, when the general electric accessory 35d is arranged in a guided state, the rotating tip sides of both guide pieces are separated from each other, and a game ball falling from obliquely above the through gate 35A can also win the through gate 35A. In other words, regardless of whether the general electric utility object 35d is placed in the non-induction state or the induction state, although it is possible to win the through gate 35A, it is in the induction state more than when it is placed in the non-induction state. When arranged, it is easier to win the through gate 35A. In other words, regardless of whether the universal electric vehicle 35d is placed in the non-guided state or the guided state, although it is possible to enter the special auditor 33, it is better than when it is placed in the non-guided state. In the case of being arranged in the guiding state, it is easier to enter the special accessory 33.

It is to be noted that the state where the game ball is likely to win the through-gate 35A (the special accessory 33) and the state where the winning is less likely to occur than the state where the winning is not impossible but the above-mentioned winning is likely to occur are common. As a configuration in which the accessory 35d can be switched, switching is performed between a state in which a prize is more likely to be generated and a state in which a prize is less likely to be generated by moving or rotating the universal electric component 35d in the front-rear direction. It may be configured. Alternatively, the general electric accessory 35d may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a prize is likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the through gate 35A itself.

A lottery is carried out for a support execution mode in which the above-mentioned general electric accessory 35d is switched from the non-guided state to the guided state based on the winning of the through gate 35A. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through-gate 35A as a trigger, and the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal figure display unit 39. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the support win, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is ended, the process shifts to the support execution mode. In the support execution mode, the utility servant 35d is in a guided state in a predetermined manner. In the present embodiment, the utility battery 34a is not provided. That is, in the first to third embodiments described above, the universal electric accessory 34a is provided to support the winning of the working opening 34, but in the present embodiment, the winning support of the special accessory 33 is provided. For this reason, the utility product 35d is provided.

The special winning combination 33 in the present embodiment is provided with a second special winning opening 253 instead of the general winning opening 53 in the first to third embodiments, and a game ball enters the special winning combination 33. When doing (when passing through the through gate 35A), the special winning opening 52 is won once every 256 times, and the other is winning in the second special winning opening 253. In addition, in the following description, the special winning opening 52 is also referred to as a first special winning opening 52.

A big hit lottery is performed with the winning of the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253 as a trigger, and the lottery result is a display effect on the special figure display parts 38a, 38b of the lottery result display part 37 and the symbol display device 42. Will be specified through.

In the first special figure display portion 38a, similarly to the first to third embodiments, the jackpot lottery is performed with the winning of the first special winning opening 52 as a trigger, whereby the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Done. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display portion 38b, the jackpot lottery is performed with the winning of the second special winning opening 253 as a trigger, and thereby variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

Further, the working port 34 is not provided in this embodiment. That is, it can be said that the second special winning opening 253 is provided in place of the actuation opening 34 in the first to third embodiments.

When the jackpot lottery based on the prizes to the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253 is successful, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. In the opening/closing execution mode in the present embodiment, a substantial contact mode and a substantial deviation mode are set. In the actual winning mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened, and the special operating prize winning device 32 is operated by operating the firing operation device 28 so as to flow the game ball to the right side area PE3 where the special electric winning device 32 is provided. This is a mode that enables. For example, in the real winning mode, the upper limit number of round games is 7 and the open duration of each round is set to 29.5 sec. Further, in the substantial off mode, although the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state, even if the firing operation device 28 is operated so as to flow down the game ball to the right side area PE3, the special electric prize winning device 32 does not win or the special electric prize winning device 32 does not win. It's a difficult mode. For example, in the substantial off mode, the upper limit number of round games is one round, and the open duration time of the round is set to 0.6 sec.

Here, a configuration for performing various kinds of lottery in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

As shown in FIG. 43, with respect to the number of reserved prize holes 52, 253 in the present embodiment, the number of prizes won in the first special prize hole 52 is 1 while the number of reserved prizes is in the second special prize hole 253. The number is reserved up to the upper limit of 4. That is, the second special figure reservation area 204 in this embodiment includes the first area 204a, the second area 204b, the third area 204c, and the fourth area 204d. Then, at the timing when the winning in the first special winning opening 52 occurs, various counters used for the winning/winning lottery for the special drawing are stored in the first special drawing holding area 103, and the winning in the second special winning opening 253. The various counters are stored in any of the areas 204a to 204d of the second special figure reservation area 204 at the timing when the occurrence of the above occurs.

In this case, in the first area 204a to the fourth area 204d, when the winnings to the second special winning opening 253 occur a plurality of times in succession, the first area 204a→the second area 204b→the third area 204c→ The fourth area 204d is stored in time series.

In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 204 is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be two, three, or five or more other numbers. The singular number may be used as in the first to third embodiments. However, in order to realize the playability described later in this embodiment, it is preferable that the number is at least smaller than the predetermined number (256) corresponding to the ceiling.

In addition, the universal figure holding area 206 in the third embodiment is adopted as the holding area on the universal figure side in the present embodiment, and a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the through gate 35A are held and stored. It is supposed to be done. In the present embodiment as well, the number that can be reserved and stored in the universal figure reservation area 206 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be two, three, or five or more other numbers. Alternatively, the number may be one as in the first and second embodiments. Further, it may be zero as in the first and second embodiments. Furthermore, the number of the second special figure reservation areas 204 and the number of the general figure reservation areas 206 need not be the same, but may be different.

Next, the configuration relating to the winning/winning lottery in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), as in the first to third embodiments, a common win/loss table for special figures is set, and the game ball is the first special winning opening 52 or the first special winning opening 52. 2 The winning/winning lottery is performed based on the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599) acquired at the timing of winning the special winning opening 253. Then, the jackpot result and the out-of-coincidence result are set as the hit/miss result, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpot result is set to 599. That is, in the present embodiment as well, the probability of a jackpot result by referring to the hit/miss table for special drawings is 599/600, which is a jackpot result of almost 100%.

When the jackpot result is obtained, the sort table for the type of jackpot result is the sort table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 44(b) and the sort table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 43(c). Minute table and are set. The distribution table for the first special diagram is a table that is referred to when a jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the first special winning opening 52. The distribution table for the second special diagram is a table that is referred to when a jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253. Then, in each distribution table, the actual hit result A and the actual hit result B that shift to the above-described opening/closing execution mode of the substantial hit mode, and the substantial deviation result that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode of the substantial deviation mode are set. There is. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter C6 is set as a distribution counter in the jackpot result. The jackpot type counter C6 is a loop counter similar to other lottery counters (value=0 to 119).

The actual hit result A and the actual hit result B differ in the support mode set after the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, also in the present embodiment, as the support mode, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the general electric utility product 35d is in the guiding state per unit time is relatively high or low. It is set.

When the distribution result is substantially the hit result A, the support mode after the corresponding opening/closing execution mode is ended is set to the high frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before that. The high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. When the distribution result is substantially the hit result B, the support mode after the corresponding opening/closing execution mode is ended is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before that.

When the distribution result is the actual deviation result, the transition to the support mode after the end of the corresponding opening/closing execution mode is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the transition of the support mode is performed after the opening/closing execution mode when the actual hit result A or the actual hit result B is reached, and when the number of games reaches the end reference number after the shift to the high frequency support mode. And,

Also in the present embodiment, the support lottery for determining whether or not to control the universal electric accessory 35d in the inductive state is performed using the universal electric random number counter C4. Further, in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the support lottery and the guidance mode of the ordinary electric utility product 35d when the support is won are different depending on the height of the support mode.

Specifically, in the universal figure hit/miss table referred to in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 45(a), a short time result and a deviation result are set as the hit/miss result. When the result of the lottery is a short time result, the general electric utility product 35d is in the guided state once, and the duration of the guided state is set to 0.3 sec. Therefore, the duration of the guiding state is shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), and even if the support win is reached, no prize is won in the through gate 35A, or at most one win is won. Is set to be. Regarding the value of the ordinary electric random number counter C4, "0 to 35" of "0 to 719" corresponds to the short time result, and "36 to 719" corresponds to the deviating result.

On the other hand, in the universal figure hit/miss table referred to in the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 45(b), a long time result and a deviation result are set as the hit/miss result. When the lottery result is a long-time result, the general electric utility product 35d is in the guided state three times, and the duration of the guided state is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, the duration of the guide state is longer than the game ball firing cycle, and the guide state is set a plurality of times (three times), so that a plurality of winnings may occur in the through gate 35A by the support winning. Regarding the value of the ordinary electric random number counter C4, "0-575" of "0-719" corresponds to the long-time result, and "576-719" corresponds to the disengagement result. That is, the probability of winning the support is set higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode.

For details of each distribution table, in the distribution table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 44B, when the value of the big hit type counter C6 is “0 to 59”, the actual win result A is obtained, In the case of "60 to 118", the actual winning result B is obtained, and in the case of "119", the substantial deviating result is obtained. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 44(c), when the value of the big hit type counter C6 is “0”, the actual win result A is obtained, and when the value is “1-119”. Substantially out of results. That is, in the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure, the distribution table for the first special figure is set to have a higher probability that the actual hit result A is obtained. The distribution table for the second special map is set to have a higher probability that the actual deviation result will occur.

As for the playability of the present embodiment configured as described above, by winning the through gate 35A, one of the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253 is generated, Based on the winning a prize of 100%, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253 are set to have a higher probability that the winning of the first special winning opening 52 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode of the real winning mode, Due to the ceiling function of 33, the first special winning opening 52 wins only once in a predetermined number of times (256 times), and the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode of the real win mode is limited.

That is, normally (other than during the ceiling), the player will win the second special winning opening 253, and based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, the result will be distributed to the real winning result A or the real winning result B. Only, the mode shifts to the open/close execution mode of the real win mode in which prize balls can be obtained. Further, even if the result of the real deviation is continuously distributed based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, the opening and closing of the real win mode is performed with high probability by winning the first special winning opening 52 at the 256th time. Switch to mode. In this way, by utilizing the ceiling function of the special accessory 33 and the difference in the lottery patterns of the plurality of winning openings 52 and 253 provided in the special accessory 33, the player's motivation to continue the game is increased. It becomes possible to improve the interest.

Further, as described above, in the high frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the through gate 35A, that is, the frequency of entering the special accessory 33 is high. In this case, although the upper limit holding number based on the winning in the second special winning opening 253 is 4, it is expected that more game balls than the upper limit holding number will be entered in relation to the digestion timing of the game times. As a result, it is possible to reach the ceiling (win the first special winning opening 52) earlier than the number of times the game is executed.

<Purchase side hold information acquisition process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46, a process of acquiring the reservation information on the universal figure side in the present embodiment will be described. The process of FIG. 46 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the first universal figure winning flag is set to "1". As described above, since the through gate 35B is not provided in the present embodiment, if "1" is not set in the first universal figure winning flag, the main acquisition processing is ended as it is. In step S2702, the first universal figure winning flag is cleared, and in step S2703, a process of adding 1 to the universal figure winning counter is executed.

In a succeeding step S2704, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of reservation information on the universal figure side is less than 4. If it is less than 4, in the subsequent step S2705, a process of adding 1 to the total number NS of the reservation information on the universal figure side and updating is executed, and in the following step S2706, the numerical information of the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is updated. It is stored in the diagram reservation area 206.

In a succeeding step S2707, a hold display lottery process is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 is provided with an area for performing a hold display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, a reserved display area 42b is provided below each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a, and the reserved display area 42b is the second special figure reserved area 204. In correspondence with the upper limit holding number, the first unit holding display area 42c, the second unit holding display area 42d, the third unit holding display area 42e, and the fourth unit holding display area 42f are divided into four display areas. ..

When the total number PS of pieces of reservation information in both special figure reservation areas 103 and 204 is 4 or 5, an image for reservation is displayed in each unit reservation display area 42c to 42f, and both special figure reservation areas 103. , 204 is 1, the hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area 42c.

That is, although the maximum number of the total number PS of the reservation information stored in both the special figure reservation areas 103 and 204 is 5, the total number PS becomes 5 when the game ball has a predetermined frequency (1/256). ) Only when the first special winning opening 52 is won (further, in this case, the total number PS2 of reservation information in the second special drawing reservation area 204 is 4). Therefore, only four unit hold display areas are provided in the hold display area 42b, and whether the total number PS of hold information in both the special figure hold areas 103 and 204 is 5 or 4 is displayed. The number of held images to be held is four. In addition, the holding image is not started to be displayed when the special winning openings 52 and 253 are won, but is started to be displayed when the through gate 35A is won. As a result, the upper limit of the reservation information that is held and stored based on the entry into the special accessory 33 is four on the surface, and it is possible to make the player think of the special accessory 33 as one winning hole.

Then, by using the numerical information of the first universal prize winning counter, the game ball actually determines whether the winning is to the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253. It is configured such that it is specified before the winning in the winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253 and the corresponding holding image is displayed. As the image for holding, the first holding image P1 is displayed when it corresponds to the winning in the first special winning opening 52, and the second holding when it corresponds to the winning in the second special winning opening 253. The image P2 for display is displayed. It is possible to distinguish which of the special winning openings 52, 253 corresponds to the winning of the special winning openings 52, 253 from the two holding images P1, P2 (the hatches are different in the drawing). That is, in the present embodiment, by displaying the first hold image P1 in the hold display area 42b, the player can recognize that the game time corresponding to the hold information corresponds to the ceiling. Has become. That is, the display of the first holding image P1 corresponds to the ceiling notification effect in the present embodiment.

Further, as the holding image, a special holding image P3 (displayed with different hatch pitches in the figure) having a color and shape different from those of the both holding images P1 and P2 is set, and step S2707 is set. In the holding display lottery process, the holding images P1 to P3 including the special holding image P3 are displayed by lottery. In this process, the hold display table provided in the ROM 83 is acquired, and the hold image is determined from the numerical value information of the first universal figure winning combination counter.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), when the numerical value information of the first prize winning counter is "0 to 255" that does not correspond to the ceiling, the hold display table does not select the first hold image P1. The 1-holding image P1 is selected only in the case of "255" corresponding to the ceiling. Further, the closer the numerical information of the first universal figure winning prize counter is to "255" corresponding to the ceiling, the easier it is for the special holding image P3 to be selected. That is, the ceiling can be specified by displaying the first holding image P1 as described above, and until the ceiling arrives, the ceiling arrival can be determined depending on the frequency at which the special holding image P3 is displayed. It is possible to recognize the number of balls to some extent. Therefore, it can be said that the display of the special reservation image P3 in the present embodiment corresponds to the ceiling notice in the first to third embodiments.

As a result, for example, when the special reservation image P3 frequently appears, it is possible to increase the motivation to continue the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the timing of displaying the image for holding is set to the through gate 35A instead of the special winning openings 52 and 253, so that the timing of entering the special accessory 33 and the winning timing of the special winning openings 52 and 253 are determined. It is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by the deviation.

Further, in step S2707, it is determined whether or not the variable display by the symbol display device 42 is being performed, and if the variable display is not performed, the above-mentioned hold display lottery process is not performed. Whether or not the variable display by the symbol display device 42 is being performed can be determined by checking the temporary variation flag and the special figure special electricity counter which are set in the RAM 84 when the temporary variation command described later is output. .. The temporary change command is a command that is output to the sound and light control device 300 when a win is generated in the through gate 35A in a situation where the special figure main change is not performed. Is set. Then, the provisional variation flag is erased when a prize is paid to the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253. In step S2707, when the temporary variation flag is not set and the value of the special figure special power counter is 0 (when the special figure main variation is not performed), the hold display lottery process is not performed.

After executing the process of step S2707, the hold command is set as an output target to the sound and light control device 300 in step S2708. The hold command includes information on the type of hold image determined in step S2707. Further, in the above step S2707, if the pending display lottery process is not performed because the winning is generated in the through gate 35A in the situation where the variable display by the symbol display device 42 is not being performed, the pending command is not set. .. The process on the sound/light control device 300 side when the hold command is received will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S2704 that the number NS of pieces of reservation information on the universal figure side is not less than 4 (NS=4), the process advances to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode is set by checking the high frequency flag. In the case of the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S2710 whether the number PS2 of reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 204 is 4. If it is 4, in the subsequent step S2711, a process of adding 1 to the ceiling shortening counter provided in the RAM 84 is executed. The ceiling shortening counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to specify the number of times a ball has entered the special accessory 33 in a situation where the number PS2 of reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 204 is 4, which is the upper limit number. ..

In subsequent step S2712, it is determined whether or not the numerical value information of the ceiling shortening counter is "156". In the case of “156”, the limit notification command is set as the output target to the sound/light control device 300 in step S2713.

As already described, when a ball enters the special accessory 33 in a situation in which the pending information based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is the upper limit number (PS2=4), the distribution within the special accessory 33 is divided. As the plate 54 is rotated, only the actual counting up to the ceiling by the first universal figure winning a prize counter is advanced. By advancing only this actual count, it is possible to reach the ceiling earlier than the actual number of times the game is executed (to win the first special winning opening 52).

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the first special map and the distribution table for the second special map, the effective hit result set in the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode in the distribution table for the second special map. Since B is not set, in the high-frequency support mode in which the number of balls to be held is small, the bonus to the second special winning opening 253 is higher than the privilege obtained by the winning/winning lottery (ceiling) based on the first special winning opening 52. It can be said that the benefit obtained by the winning/winning lottery based on the winning is preferable to the player.

Because of such playability, the player in the high-frequency support mode receives the winning/non-winning determination based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, and immediately or immediately before the high-frequency support mode ends. It is preferable to arrive at (to receive a win/fail judgment based on a winning in the first special winning opening 52). However, as described in the first embodiment, the state of each distribution plate 54 is difficult or invisible to the player, and after how many game balls are put into the special accessory 33, It is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp whether the game is distributed to the one special winning opening 52.

The numerical value information of the ceiling shortening counter determined in step S2712 is the maximum number that can advance only the actual count up to the ceiling in the high frequency support mode, and only the actual count more than this number is advanced. And that means you will reach the ceiling during high frequency support mode. The limit notification command set in step S2713 is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to identify such a situation. The sound/light control device 300 that has received the limit notification command controls the speaker unit 65, the display light emitting unit 63, and the like as the limit notification for notifying the player of such a situation. The processing on the sound and light control device 300 side will be described in detail later.

That is, as described above, the player is notified by the limit in the high-frequency support mode in the high-frequency support mode as described above while receiving the success/failure determination based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, and after the end of the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to grasp the situation in which it is possible to reach the ceiling immediately or at the end.

After performing the processing of step S2708 or step S2713, or when making a negative determination in any of steps S2709, S2710, and S2712, the process proceeds to step S2714. In step S2714, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the special map special electric power counter is "0" to determine whether or not the special figure main fluctuation is not performed. When the special figure main fluctuation is not performed, the temporary fluctuation start command is set as an output target to the sound and light control device 300 in step S2715. The temporary fluctuation start command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to specify that a prize (a ball to the special accessory 33) to the through gate 35A has occurred in a situation where the special figure main fluctuation is not performed. That is, further, it is a command for starting the production of the game times before the winning of the special winning openings 52, 253 by using the passage of the through gate 35A as a trigger. The processing on the sound and light control device 300 side will be described in detail later. In step S2715, "1" is set in the temporary variation flag as described above. As a result, the MPU 82 can understand that the variable display is being performed on the symbol display device 42 in a situation where the special figure main variation is not being performed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2714, or after the processing of step S2715 is executed, it is determined in step S2716 whether or not the numerical information of the first universal figure winning combination counter is "256" corresponding to the ceiling. If it is not "256", the main acquisition processing is ended as it is.

If the numerical information of the first universal figure winning prize counter is "256" in step S2716, the first universal figure winning prize counter is cleared in step S2717, and the ceiling shortening counter is cleared in step S2718. , This acquisition processing ends.

<Universal figure fluctuation start processing>
Next, the universal figure fluctuation start process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the process of FIG. 48 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG. 39.

In this embodiment, similar to the processing in steps S2401 to S2410, the success/failure determination processing is performed in steps S2801 to S2810. In step S2811, the variation display time and the stop result on the universal figure display unit 39 are grasped, and the grasped variation display time is set in the universal figure universal telephone timer counter in step S2812, and in step S2813 the universal figure display unit 39 is displayed. The variable display at is started. Then, in step S2814, 1 is added to the universal figure/general counter, and the universal figure variation start process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation command and type command for the universal figure are not output to the sound/light control device 300 (step S2416), and the variation display (general figure sub) corresponding to the regular figure main variation is displayed on the symbol display device 42 side. (Variation) is not performed. Then, the variable display on the side of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning in the through gate 35A is only the temporary variable display being started in the situation where the special figure main fluctuation is not performed (step S2715).

<Acquisition process of pending information on special map side>
Next, the special figure side pending information acquisition process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 49. Note that the process of FIG. 49 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, similar to the processing in steps S901 to S905, the acquisition processing on the first special view side is executed in steps S2901 to S2905. In step S2906, it is determined whether or not the second special figure winning flag is set to "1", and if it is set, a process of clearing it is executed in step S2907. In a succeeding step S2908, it is determined whether or not the number PS2 of the holding information on the second special drawing side is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, and if it is less than 4, the holding on the second special drawing side is held in step S2909. The number of pieces of information PS2 is incremented by 1 and updated. In subsequent step S2910, various numerical information of various counters are stored in corresponding areas 204a to 204d of second special figure reservation area 204. The sorting determination counter stored in step S2910 is the jackpot type counter C6 instead of the support type counter C2, and this is the same in the process on the first special map side in step S2905. When a negative determination is made in step S2906 or step S2908, or after the processing of step S2910 has been executed, this acquisition processing ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, unlike the first to third embodiments, the situation in which the process associated with the hit determination on the second special drawing side is being performed (the pending information is stored in the special drawing execution area 105). Even in the situation), the processing for storing the reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 204 is executed. Along with that, in the data setting process (FIG. 22) in the present embodiment, the process of setting “1” to the second special figure in-execution flag (step S1107) and the flag in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21) are cleared. The processing (step S1012) is not executed (not shown). In addition, since the upper limit number of the hold information on the second special figure side is increased, in step S1105 of the data setting process in the present embodiment, the number PS2 of the hold information on the second special figure side is subtracted by 1 and updated. Change to a process that does.

<Tokuden termination processing>
Next, the special electric power termination processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the process of FIG. 50 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as in step S1301, and if it has not elapsed, the special electric power termination processing is ended.

In a succeeding step S3102, it is determined whether or not the game result which triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a substantial deviation result. Although detailed description with the drawings is omitted, in the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 21) in the present embodiment, the distribution determination processing ( After step S1008, a process of setting “1” to the flag corresponding to the game result distributed is executed. Specifically, if the per-substance result A is set to "1", the per-substitution A flag is set to "1". Set the detachment flag to "1". In step S3102, it is possible to determine whether or not the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a substantial deviation result by checking the substantial deviation flag.

If it is not the actual deviation result in step S3102, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the actual winning result A. In such processing, the above-mentioned substantial hit flag is referred to. When the actual hit result is A, the processing relating to the setting of the high frequency support mode is executed in steps S3104 to S3106 as in the case of steps S1303 to S1305. In addition, when it is not the actual hit result A in step S3103, it means that the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is the actual hit result B. In this case, the steps S3107 to S3109 are executed. Then, similar to the processing in steps S1306 to S1308, the processing related to the setting of the low frequency support mode is executed.

When the result is substantially out of step S3102, or after the process of either step S3106 or step S3109 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3110. The processing of steps S3110 and S3111 is the same as the processing of steps S1309 and S1310 described above. After performing the processing of step S3111, the special electric power termination processing is terminated.

That is, in this embodiment, the transition to the support mode is not performed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the substantial deviation mode based on the substantial deviation result.

<Production determination process executed by the sound/light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the process of FIG. 51 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG. 25.

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received, and if it is received, the hold command is directly transmitted to the display control device 400 as a hold display process in step S3202. On the basis of the receipt of the hold command, the display control device 400 reads the information on the type of the hold image included in the hold command, reads the corresponding hold images P1 to P3 from the character ROM 406, and holds the hold image. The processing for displaying the use images P1 to P3 in the corresponding unit hold display areas 42c to 42f of the hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 42 is executed. Although the detailed description is omitted with reference to the drawing, the holding image is the fourth unit hold display area 42f→the third unit hold display area 42e, the third unit hold display area 42e→the second unit hold when the game effect is started. The display area 42d, the second unit hold display area 42d→the first unit hold display area 42c are shifted in this order, and the image in the first unit hold display area 42c is cleared.

When a negative determination is made in step S3201, or after the processing of step S3202 is executed, it is determined in step S3203 whether or not the temporary variation command is received. When the temporary fluctuation command is received, the temporary fluctuation start process is executed in step S3204, and then the temporary fluctuation start command is transmitted to the display control device 400 as it is in step S3205. In the temporary variation start process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 are controlled so as to start the game production effect. Further, the display control device 400 that has received the temporary fluctuation start command controls the symbol display device 42 so as to start the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

By the way, in the production which is started by receiving these temporary variation commands, the production pattern such as the presence or absence of the subsequent occurrence of the reach and the final stop result are not decided, and only the variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the The production by the accompanying sound and light control device 300 is only started. That is, the effect pattern for provisional variation is predetermined in the sound/light control device 300 and the display control device 400. Then, the display control device 400 reads preset data from the program ROM 403, and outputs a drawing list to the VDP 405 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached according to the data. As a result, in the symbol display device 42, a predetermined temporary variation effect is executed.

Regarding the effect for this temporary change, specifically, it is an effect until the variable display of the symbols is started and thereafter each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 reaches the high speed variation, and after each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 reaches the high speed variation. Is set so that its state is maintained.

When a negative determination is made in step S3203 or after the processing of step S3205 is executed, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the limit notification command is received. When the limit notification command is received, the limit notification command is directly transmitted to the display control device 400 as a limit notification process in step S3207. In the display control device 400, based on the reception of the limit notification command, background information is read from the character ROM 406 so as to change the background of the variable display of each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 as the limit notification, and the background is read. The symbol display device 42 is controlled so as to perform variable display using the data.

When a negative determination is made in step S3206 or after the processing of step S3207 is executed, it is determined in step S3208 whether or not the variation command and the type command at the time of special figure variation are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in subsequent step S3209 based on the processing results of steps S3103 to S3105 whether a temporary change is being executed.

If the temporary change is not executed, in step S3110, a symbol determination process for determining a stop symbol is executed based on the received variation command and type command for special figure variation, and in step S3211. Performs a process for determining the effect pattern. These processings are the same as the processings in step S1411 and step S1412 described above.

That is, in step S3210, a combination of stop symbols is determined according to the game result of the game time started this time. Specifically, in the case of a real hit result A, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same combination of odd symbols is formed on any of the activated lines, and in the case of a real hit result B, either The combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same even number of symbols is formed on the effective line of the stop, and in the case of the result of the actual deviation, stop so that the same symbol combination is not formed on any of the effective lines. Determine the combination of symbols. That is, in the present embodiment, by stopping the combination of the same even number of symbols, it is indicated that the switching to the open/close execution mode based on the actual hit result B is performed, and then to the low frequency support mode.

Further, in step S3211, by referring to the effect table for special figure variation time stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound and light control device 300, the effect duration time corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time ( A production pattern is selected together with the production continuation period). In the sound and light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S3211, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game time associated with the special figure winning prize is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed.

In a succeeding step S3212, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S3210 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S3211 are transmitted to display control device 400. In the display control device 400, based on the received stop result command and the pattern command, a data table for performing the effect for this game play on the symbol display device 42 is read from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400, According to the data table, the drawing list is output to the VDP 405 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached. Thereby, in the symbol display device 42, the effect for game play is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound/light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

When the temporary change is performed in step S3209, the symbol determination process for replacement is executed in step S3213. This process is similar to the process of step S3110. That is, the final stop symbol is determined by the received variation command and type command regardless of whether or not the temporary variation is executed.

In a succeeding step S3114, a process for determining the effect pattern for replacement is executed. This process is almost the same as the process of step S3111. The difference is that among the effect patterns selected by the change command and type command and the effect table for special figure change, the effects from the start of the change in the change display of the symbols to the high-speed change are deleted, and then this time. It is determined as the effect pattern for replacement of.

In subsequent step S3115, the replacement stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S3113 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S3214 are transmitted to display control device 400. In the display control device 400, based on the received stop result command for replacement and the pattern command, a data table for replacing the effect for temporary variation is read from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400, and according to the data table, A drawing list is output to the VDP 405 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached. As a result, in the symbol display device 42, the effect for game play already started according to the effect pattern determined by the sound/light control device 300 is replaced, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the relationship between the winning through the through gate 35A (universal drawing winning), the winning through the special winning openings 52, 253 (special drawing winning), and the variable display based on these winnings will be described. To do.

If a prize is generated in the through gate 35A at the timing of t1 which is a situation in which the variable display on the symbol display device 42 is not performed (temporary change is not performed and the special-design special-electricity counter is 0), Along with the start of the figure main variation, a temporary variation start command is output in the process of acquiring the reservation information on the universal figure side (FIG. 46), and the temporary variation (sub-variation) in the symbol display device 42 is started. When the game ball that wins the through gate 35A at the timing of t1 wins at one of the special winning openings 52 and 253 at the timing of t2, the special figure main fluctuation is started and the sound and light control device 300 temporarily changes. Is output to the main fluctuation (step S3215 in FIG. 51), and the temporary fluctuation started at the timing of t1 is replaced. Then, the general figure main fluctuation ends at the timing of t3, and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 42 also ends at the timing when the special figure main fluctuation at t4 ends.

On the other hand, at the timing of t5 which is the situation where the variable display on the symbol display device 42 is being performed (the temporary variation is being performed or the special figure special power counter is not 0), the winning to the through gate 35A is generated. In this case, the general-purpose main fluctuation starts, but the temporary fluctuation command is not output. In addition, the game ball which has won the through gate 35A at the timing of t5 wins at one of the special winning openings 52 and 253 at the timing of t6. When the special figure main fluctuation that was being executed at the timing of t5 ends at the timing of t7, the pending information on the special figure that has already been acquired (if the temporary fluctuation is being performed at the timing of t6, the timing of t6 It is the hold information on the special map side acquired in step t8, based on the hold information on the special map side acquired before the timing of t6 if the special map special call counter is not 0 at the timing of t6). From the timing, the special figure main fluctuation and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 42 are started. Then, these fluctuations end at the timing of t10.

Next, the flow of the game of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

When the game ball wins the through gate 35A and enters the special accessory 33, the game ball is distributed to the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253. In this case, it is usually distributed to the second special winning opening 253, and is distributed to the first special winning opening 52 only when the ceiling is reached.

When a prize is awarded to the second special winning opening 253, the jackpot result is almost 100%, and the jackpot result types are sorted based on the sorting table for the second special figure. In this case, there is a 1 in 120 probability that the result A is a real hit, and the rest is an out-of-effect result. When the actual hit result A is reached, the opening/closing execution mode of the actual hit mode is entered, and winning of the special electric prize winning device 32 is allowed (a prize ball can be obtained). When the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the number of times of execution of the game times reaches the specified end number (100 times). Further, in the high frequency support mode, since the player frequently enters the special accessory 33 (because he can win the prize by winning the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253), he does not reduce the number of balls he holds. The game can be continued (expecting the opening/closing execution mode of the next actual per hit mode).

As described above, the pending information acquired based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is stored only up to the maximum number of four pieces, but it is a situation in which the maximum number of pending information pieces is stored. However, the actual counting on the ceiling proceeds. In the high frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the through gate 35A, that is, the frequency of entering the special accessory 33 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the above actual count is easily progressed. It becomes possible. That is, it is possible to easily win the first special winning opening 52.

When reaching the ceiling, a prize is generated in the first special winning opening 52, which also results in almost 100% jackpot. However, in the distribution table for the first special figure, 1/5 is the actual hit result A and 4/5 is the actual hit result B. When the actual hit result B is reached, the open/close execution mode of the actual hit mode is entered, but when the open/close execution mode ends, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode instead of the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, although it is possible to easily count the actual count as described above, rather than counting until reaching the ceiling, the actual count is based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253. It is preferable for the player to be distributed to the hit result A.

Therefore, as a player, in the high-frequency support mode, even if the number PS2 of the holding information on the second special map side is 4, which is the upper limit value, in order to advance the actual count to the extent that the ceiling is not reached first. A prize is awarded to the through gate 35A (special accessory 33). Then, if the jackpot result based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is sorted to the actual winning result A in the sorting determination process (step S1008), the high-frequency support mode continues, and the player continues holding it. You can continue the game without losing the ball. In this case, the actual count is near the ceiling at the end of the high frequency support mode even if the result A is not actually distributed to the winning result A during the high frequency support mode, and immediately after that, the first special winning opening 52 is won. Based on this, it is possible to shift to the opening/closing execution mode of the substantial hitting mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number of terminations of the high-frequency support mode is set each time the opening/closing execution mode of the substantial hit mode is terminated, while the first universal prize winning counter is set to the ceiling function of the special accessory 33. Since they are linked, they are set (cleared to 0) every time they reach the ceiling.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cause a change in the number of prize balls that can be expected thereafter, depending on the value of the first universal prize winning counter (whether it is far or close to the ceiling) when the player starts to hit. it can. Specifically, the closer the value of the first universal figure winning prize counter at the time of start of striking is to the value corresponding to the ceiling, the sooner it is possible to win the prize in the first special winning opening 52. On the other hand, immediately after reaching the ceiling, the value of the first universal figure prize winning counter is the farthest from the ceiling, so from the viewpoint of obtaining the opening/closing execution mode of the actual winning mode based on the winning of the first special winning opening 52. It seems to be unfavorable to the player. However, in the situation where the value of the first universal prize winning counter is small, the case of shifting to the high frequency support mode based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is based on the special prize without reducing the number of balls held thereafter. The period for receiving the win/loss lots (sorting lottery) becomes longer.

This will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b). FIG. 54(a) shows an example in the case where the first general-purpose prize winning counter has a value of "0", and FIG. 54(b) has a value of "200". Is shown.

In any case, if the winning/discarding lottery (sorting lottery) is carried out based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, for example, if the result of the 10th winning is actually distributed to the result A, then high frequency support is provided. At the start of the mode, when the first universal figure winning award counter starts to hit from "0", the required number of balls to reach the ceiling is "246", which is more than the prescribed number of endings of the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the first universal prize winning counter starts to hit from "200", the required number of balls to reach the ceiling is "46", which is smaller than the prescribed number of terminations of the high frequency support mode.

For example, if the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "246", then the 86th prize (the first universal figure prize counter is "96") is allocated to the actual result A, and then the 90th prize. (1st universal prize winning counter is "186"), it is distributed to the real win result A, and when the ceiling is reached thereafter, the real win result A is three times including the initial win and the real win result B of the ceiling. The player can get once. Since the game is played in the high-frequency support mode during this period, it is possible to obtain a prize ball in the opening/closing execution mode of the real hit mode for four times without significantly reducing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, for example, if the required number of balls to reach the ceiling is “46”, the ceiling will be reached by the 46th prize, and the actual winning result A will be achieved in any of the 46th prizes. If it is not distributed to the player, the player will get the first real hit result A and the ceiling real hit result B once.

Therefore, during the high-frequency support mode, the possibility of being actually distributed to the result A based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 (the number of times the winning/discarding lottery and the distribution lottery can be received) is the first ordinary figure winning prize. It is easier to implement when the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode when the value of the counter is small, and it is more preferable for the player to start striking when the value of the first universal figure winning award counter is small. By doing this, even if the value of the first universal figure prize counter is small and far from the ceiling, the player is expected to actively play the game, and it is possible to encourage the player to actively participate in the game. Becomes

In addition, in practice, the value of the first universal prize winning counter cannot be seen by the player, and as described above, the condition of the distribution plate 54 of the special accessory 33 is difficult to see or cannot be seen. It is difficult for the player who is actually playing the game and the person who has confirmed the game near the player who is playing the game to know whether the game is far or near to the ceiling. However, it is common that the number of times a game is played, not the actual count up to the ceiling, is displayed by a data counter or the like installed in the game hall. It is possible to estimate the actual count up to the ceiling from the above.

Further, in such a data counter or the like, not only the actual number of times the game has been executed but also the actual count up to the ceiling may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable that the value of the first prize winning counter is externally output from the main controller 71 or the like to the data counter or the like directly or indirectly via a hall computer or the like.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The game ball that has passed through the through gate 35A normally wins the second special winning opening 253. On the basis of this winning, in the special information side pending information acquisition processing (FIG. 49), the pending information is acquired on condition that the number PS2 of the second special drawing side pending information is less than the specified number (4). .. Then, the special information variation start processing (FIG. 21) is performed on the suspension information to determine whether or not the distribution is determined (steps S1006 and S1008). Switch to mode. In such a configuration, the game ball that has entered the 256th time is distributed to the first special winning opening 52 by the ceiling function of the special accessory 33. Then, when a prize is generated in the first special winning opening 52, there is a probability of almost 100% to shift to the opening/closing execution mode of the actual winning mode. As a result, even if the number of pending information on the side of the second special figure has reached the specified number, at least up to the ceiling of the special accessory 33 if the game ball is passed through the through gate 35A (special accessory 33). Since it is possible to advance the actual count of, it is possible to encourage the player to continue the launch of the game ball.

As described above, when the winning in the first special winning opening 52 occurs, the opening/closing execution mode of the real win mode may be switched with a probability of almost 100%, but may not be transferred with a predetermined probability. Specifically, in the hit/miss determination processing, a deviation result is obtained with a probability of 1/600, and even a jackpot result is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode of the substantial deviation mode with a probability of 1/120. As a result, it is possible to suppress gambling motivation without raising the ball launch rate too much. In addition, in order to enhance the effect of suppressing the euphoria, it is preferable to increase the probability that the result of the outlier or the result of the substantial outage is obtained. In addition, as a method of suppressing euphoria, the privilege obtained in the opening/closing execution mode of the substantial hit mode may be reduced. Specifically, the number of rounds may be reduced, the number of prize balls based on the winning in the special winning opening 32a may be reduced, or the maximum number of balls per round may be reduced.

When the numerical information of the first winning symbol winning prize counter reaches the special number (156) before reaching the ceiling (256), it becomes the special number on the symbol display device 42 by the limit notification process (step S3207). It is configured to notify that. As a result, the player can recognize how soon the player will reach the ceiling, and can encourage continued execution of the game.

The through-gate 35A is provided with a universal electric accessory 35d that can be displaced between the guided state and the non-guided state. The configuration is such that the switching to the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode is triggered by the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the substantial hit mode. Specifically, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the actual hit result A, the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times is entered, and after the opening/closing execution mode based on the actual hit result B, the low-frequency support mode is entered. Then, in the distribution table for the first special figure, there is a possibility of being distributed to either of the real hit results A and B, and in the distribution table for the second special figure, there is a possibility of being distributed only to the real hit result A. .. That is, there is a possibility of shifting to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode that shifts depending on the ceiling, and there is no possibility of shifting to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253. ..

In this case, when the player shifts to the opening/closing execution mode of the substantial winning mode based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, the second second without causing the ceiling to reach during the high-frequency support mode thereafter. Based on the winning of the special winning opening 253, it is expected that the actual winning result A will be assigned. Furthermore, even if this high-frequency support mode reaches the stipulated number of times (100 times) (even if it shifts to the low-frequency support mode), the high-frequency support is made to reach the ceiling as soon as possible. Adjust the number of balls entered during the mode. In addition, when it reaches the ceiling, it is expected that it will be effectively distributed to the result A. In this way, a new game can be provided by utilizing the ceiling function of the special accessory 33 and the universal electric accessory 35d provided in the through gate 35A.

The number of times the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times is terminated is set to be less than the number of passages corresponding to the ceiling. If the specified number of times of termination is larger than the number of passages corresponding to the ceiling, the high frequency support mode is in progress even if it is not passed to the through gate 35A in the situation where the number of holdings on the second special map side is the upper limit. You'll end up at the ceiling. In this case, it is not preferable in the above game in which the actual count is advanced to near the ceiling and the ceiling is reached immediately after the high-frequency support mode ends. Therefore, by setting the prescribed number of times for termination as described above, it is possible to suitably realize the above game.

When the number of holdings on the second special map side is the upper limit, when the passage to the through gate 35A further occurs, the ceiling shortening counter is incremented by 1 and the ceiling shortening counter is set to 156 in the high frequency support mode. When it becomes, the design of the limit display is performed by the symbol display device 42. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to know that the limit value for advancing only the actual count has been reached during the high-frequency support mode, and to help the game to end the high-frequency support mode near the ceiling. You can

Generally, in a gaming machine having a ceiling function, a player selects a table close to the ceiling to play a game, so that a table far from the ceiling, that is, a table immediately after the ceiling tends to be shunned. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since there is a possibility of shifting to the low frequency support mode after the ceiling opening/closing execution mode, the actual winning result is based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 during the high frequency support mode. The substantial condominiums assigned to A have a higher possibility of obtaining the substantial condominiums after that when the low-frequency support mode in the stage far from the ceiling is switched to the high-frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to realize a remedy function for the player called the ceiling, and to play the game without being shunned even by the table immediately after the ceiling.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments alone, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in a predetermined combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the state of each distribution plate 54 may be manually changed from outside the special accessory 33. Specifically, the special accessory 33 is configured so that the state of each distribution plate 54 can be operated from the back side of the game board 24 while the front door frame 14 is rotated forward of the game ball. For example, the rotation shaft 55 of the distribution plate 54 is projected to the back side of the game board 24 as an operation unit, and the operation unit of the rotation shaft 55 is manually rotated to forcibly change the state of each distribution plate 54. It can be so. This makes it possible to easily change the combination of the states of the plurality of distribution plates 54. Further, the combination of the states of the plurality of distribution plates 54 is possible by rotating the front door frame 14 forward of the game ball, so the hall manager can change it, but the player cannot change it. Has become. As a result, it is possible to perform a morning setting that gives a privilege to the player who started playing the game in the pachinko machine 10 in the morning.

Further, as a configuration in which some of the plurality of (8) distribution plates 54 can be fixed so that the distribution destination thereof is the first passage 51a (the passage through which the special winning opening 52 can be won) Good. For example, if the distribution destination of any of the five distribution plates 54 among the eight distribution plates 54 is fixed to the first passage side and the remaining three distribution plates 54 are not fixed, When the number of game balls passing through the passing port 33a becomes "8 (=2 to the third power)", the game ball is won in the special winning port 52. In this case, the game balls can be won in the special winning opening 52 once every eight passages. That is, the ceiling price can be changed, and the ceiling setting mode can be diversified.

(2) In the special accessory 33 of each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of distribution plates 54 are provided with electric actuators (driving units) such as solenoids, respectively, and the distribution destination of each distribution plate 54 is switched by the actuator. Good. In this case, each distribution plate 54 is preferably configured to be independently driven. In such a configuration, the distribution destination of any one of the distribution plates 54 is fixed to the side of the first passage 51a (the passage that can win the special winning opening 52) by driving the actuator, or the second passage 51b (the special winning opening 52). Can be fixed to a passage where winning is not possible, in the fourth embodiment, a passage where winning can be won in the second special winning opening 253), whereby a predetermined number (gaming balls are put into the special winning opening 52) It is possible to change the required number of passing balls) to either the increase side or the decrease side.

For example, if the distribution destination of any of the five distribution plates 54 among the eight distribution plates 54 is fixed to the first passage side and the remaining three distribution plates 54 are not fixed, When the number of game balls passing through the passing port 33a becomes "8 (=2 to the third power)", the game ball is won in the special winning port 52. In this case, the game balls can be won in the special winning opening 52 once every eight passages. That is, the ceiling price can be changed, and the ceiling setting mode can be diversified.

Further, the actuator may be controllable by a control means (for example, main controller 71). In this case, the control means determines a distribution destination of each distribution plate 54 by executing a predetermined distribution control program, and drives the actuator based on the result. Thereby, the distribution destination of each distribution plate 54 can be arbitrarily switched by the control, and the game content (specification) and the game effect can be diversified. For example, a predetermined number (the number of passing balls required to win a game ball at the special winning opening 52) may be changed between the normal state and the highly accurate state.

Further, in the special accessory 33, a distribution plate 54 that mechanically operates as the game ball flows down and a distribution plate 54 that is electrically driven by an electric actuator may be provided in a mixed manner. ..

(3) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the value of the first universal figure winning prize counter that counts the number of gaming balls won in the special accessory 33 becomes 251 and approaches "256", the symbol display device 42 Although the configuration is such that the ceiling notice is executed, the form of the notification is not limited to this, and the value of the first universal prize winning counter and the remaining amount up to the ceiling each time the game time based on the universal figure normal control process is executed. The number of times may be notified. In this case, the value of the first universal prize winning counter and the number of remaining coins to the ceiling are not kept informed even after the game time is over, but may be informed only between the start and the end of the game time. .. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 on the verge of the ceiling cannot obtain the notification information unless the player plays the game, and the player can be prompted to play the game.

(4) It may be configured to execute the injustice notification using the value of the first universal figure winning prize counter. For example, at the time of winning the special winning opening 52, the value of the first universal figure winning counter is acquired, it is determined whether or not the value is “256” which is the number of ceilings, and if the counter value≠256, It is considered that the prize has been fraudulently generated. In this case, a configuration may be considered in which the main controller 71 outputs an injustice notification command to the hall computer and the sound/light controller 300.

(5) In the first to third embodiments described above, the special winning combination 33 is provided with the special winning opening 52 and the general winning opening 53, and the game ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 33a has one of these winning openings 52, 53. Although it is configured to be distributed to either one, by changing this, the game ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 33a is either the special winning opening 52 or the out opening 24a (incoming opening without payout associated with entering the ball). It may be configured to be distributed to.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the cover member 60 that covers each distribution plate 54 from the front of the gaming machine in the special accessory 33 is provided, and each distribution plate 54 is invisible to the player by the cover member 60. However, this may be changed so that each distribution plate 54 can be visually recognized by the player. In this case, if each distribution plate 54 can be seen, the future game situation can be easily predicted, and the player's motivation for the game can be further enhanced.

(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the main controller 71 (MPU 82), the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A provided in the left area PE2, that is, the number of game balls that have passed through the ball passage opening 33a is first. The ordinary figure winning counter is used for counting, and the ceiling notification command is set when the count value reaches a predetermined value (=251) before the ceiling (step S403, step S408, step S409 in FIG. 15). Then, the sound and light control device 300 is configured to receive the ceiling notification command and perform an effect corresponding to the ceiling notification. You may change such a structure as follows.

For example, in the sound/light control device 300 which is a sub control device, the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A, that is, the number of game balls that have passed through the ball passage opening 33a is counted, and the count value is a predetermined value in front of the ceiling ( =251), the effect corresponding to the ceiling notification is carried out. In this case, in the sound and light control device 300, it is preferable to receive the signal indicating the ball passing through the through gate 35A from the main control device 71, and accordingly, to count the number of universal figure winnings on the side of the through gate 35A. In this configuration, the main controller 71 does not need to count, and the counting process may be omitted.

Further, in the configuration for counting the number of sphere passages of the through gate 35A in the sound/light control device 300 as described above, the number of sphere passages of the through gate 35A becomes the number of ceilings (=256) for the jackpot on the side of the sound/light control device 300. You can recognize that you have reached. Therefore, when the number of balls passing through the through gate 35A reaches the number of ceilings for jackpot winning (=256), the sound and light control device 300 executes an effect equivalent to jackpot winning as a symbol variation of the symbol display device 42. You may In this case, in the sound and light control device 300, before the game ball wins the special winning opening 52 (that is, the period from when the game ball wins the through gate 35A until it wins the special winning opening 52). It is preferable to output a command to the display control device 400 so as to start a symbol variation (a symbol variation in which a stopped symbol becomes a jackpot symbol) corresponding to a jackpot winning.

(8) While the game time based on the universal figure normal power control processing is being executed on the symbol display device 42 (when the universal figure normal power counter ≠0), the game time based on the special figure special power control processing is not started. It may be configured. In this case, in the configuration in which the symbol variation based on the universal figure normal power control process and the symbol variation based on the special pattern special power control process are carried out by the same symbol display device 42, the symbol variation by the universal pattern special power control is halfway. It can suppress being interrupted by.

(9) In the above-described first to third embodiments, by using the special character 33, the game balls that have won the through gate 35A win the special winning opening 52 at a predetermined ratio. The game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A without using the object 33 may be configured to win the special winning opening 52 at a predetermined ratio. For example, in addition to a ball entry section (eg, a special winning opening 52) in which the winning/discarding lottery to the open/close execution mode and the game times on the symbol display device 42 are performed on the game board 24, a passage section through which a game ball can pass (eg, A through gate 35A) is provided, and the ball-entering portion and the passage portion are arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the passage portion can enter the ball-entering portion. Then, if the game display is performed on the symbol display device 42 based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, the player can be prevented from getting tired. It is possible. And even with such a configuration, since the request for the game reproduction effect to the symbol display device 42 may overlap, by providing a means for replacing the effect in the case of overlap, it is possible to suitably exhibit the above effect. Becomes

That is, in the case where there are a plurality of start timings for the play of the game times as described above, the realization of the play of the game times related to the profit for the player (the effect based on the entry into the entry portion) Therefore, it is necessary to inform the player of the lottery result related to the profit. In addition, it is assumed that the player, of course, will be highly interested in the performance of the game times related to such profits. In this case, for example, the effect of the game time being executed (the effect based on the ball entering the passage section) is performed to the end, and the effect of the game time that reflects the result of the transition determination (ball entering the ball entering section) If the player wants to know the result of the winning/winning lottery as soon as possible, the player will feel tired because the performance is not related to the result of the winning/winning lottery. I can hug you. In that case, the dramatic effect of the game times based on the passage of the passage portion prepared so that the player does not get tired may become an obstacle for the player.

Therefore, in such a case, by replacing the effect of the game time being executed with the effect of the game time corresponding to the result of the winning/disapproving lottery, the effect of the game time can be produced without feeling the fatigue as described above. The effect of the frequently performed configuration can be suitably achieved.

(10) In the first and second embodiments, when the requests for the game times are duplicated, the effects are replaced regardless of the remaining variable display time of the game times being executed. You may change to. That is, when the main control device 71 determines that the remaining variable display time of the game times being executed is shorter than the predetermined period (predetermined time), the sound and light control device 300 (or the display control device 400) performs the execution. It may be configured such that after the end of the middle game time (after the end of the general figure sub-variation), the effect of the game time (special figure sub-variation) is started. In this case, for example, in the situation where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped, it is not necessary to change these again, and it is possible to execute the effect of the game times corresponding to the ceiling without a feeling of strangeness.

As a specific process of this configuration, in the first embodiment, in the acquisition information setting process (FIG. 23), before the step S1201, a process of grasping the remaining variable display time on the universal figure side is added, and the remaining If the variable display time is a predetermined period (for example, a period corresponding to that all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are already stopped), the variable display time of the special figure main fluctuation is set to the support mode. It is the variable display time for the corresponding special drawing. In this case, the ordinary figure sub-variation is ended as it is according to the variation display time set at the start. In addition, when the above predetermined period is set to be long, it may be ended immediately. In this case, a command to that effect is output to the sound/light control device 300 so as to immediately end, and the sound/light control device 300 side receives the command to immediately end the effect being executed. It is advisable to replace the effect.

Further, the special figure sub-variation is output to the sound and light control device 300 (variation command and type command) so that the general figure sub-variation is executed subsequently. Here, the fluctuation display time of the special figure sub fluctuation is defined as the time obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time of the above-mentioned general figure from the fluctuation display time of the special figure main fluctuation, and the information of the fluctuation display time is used as a command to that effect. And output to the sound/light control device 300. By doing so, it is possible to match the end timing of the effect (special figure sub-variation) of the game time on the sound and light control device 300 side with the end timing of the variation display (special figure main variation) on the main control device 71 side. Becomes

As a modification of the second embodiment, the acquisition processing of the reservation information on the universal figure side (FIG. 30) is changed, and the acquisition information setting processing (FIG. 33) is changed.

In the process of acquiring the reservation information on the universal figure side according to the present modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, the processes of steps S3201 to S3210 are executed as in steps S1701 to S1710. Then, in step S3211, it is determined whether or not the general/universal/universal electric power counter is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the effect of the game times as the general/universal/universal sub-variation is performed. When the general-use figure sub-variation is performed, the general-use figure main variation is also performed, and in step S3212, the remaining variation display time of the ongoing general-use figure main variation is grasped. Then, in step S3213, based on the processing result of step S3212, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation display time of the general-purpose main variation being executed is shorter than a predetermined period.

When the remaining fluctuation display time of the general figure main fluctuation is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the ceiling replacement command of step S3214 is set to "1", and the ceiling replacement command of step S3215 is set as an output target. To do. When the remaining fluctuation display time of the general-purpose main fluctuation is shorter than the predetermined period, the processes of these steps S3214 and S3215 are not performed. As a result, even if a ball corresponding to the ceiling occurs during execution of the general figure sub-variation, the general figure sub-variation in execution can be ended when the variation display time elapses (step S1906: NO). ).

In step S3213, if the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal figure main fluctuation is shorter than the predetermined period, in step S3216 a process of setting "1" to the completed flag provided in the RAM 84 is executed. The completed flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to know that the general-purpose figure sub-variation that is being executed is terminated by the elapse of the variation display time even when a ball corresponding to the ceiling occurs. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3211, or after the processing of step S3215 or step S3216 has been executed, processing of setting the ceiling flag to "1" is carried out in step S3217, and the first universal figure winning counter in step S3218. After the process of clearing is executed, the reservation information acquisition process on the universal figure side is ended.

In the acquisition information setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not the high-frequency flag is set to "1", and if the high-frequency flag is not set to "1". In step S3302, it is determined whether "1" is set in the above-mentioned completed flag. If "1" is not set in the completed flag, processing for grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the main figure main fluctuation is performed in steps S3303 to S3306. The processes of steps S3303 to S3306 are the same as the processes of steps S2002 to S2005.

If "1" is set in the completed flag in step S3302, a process of grasping the special figure variation time corresponding to the support mode is executed in step S3307. After the special figure stop result is grasped in step S3308, a process of setting the fluctuation time grasped in step S3306 or step S3307 in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in step S3309, and the process proceeds to step S3310.

Accordingly, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the general figure main fluctuation is short, the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode is set.

In step S3310, it is determined whether "1" is set in the high frequency flag, and if not set, the process proceeds to step S3311. In step S3311, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the above-mentioned completed flag. If not set, in step S3312 and step S3313, the confirmation processing of the ceiling replacement flag and the processing of erasing it are performed. Execute. These processes are similar to the processes of steps S2010 and S2011. If a negative determination is made in step S3310, the end flag is set to "1" in step S3311, or after the process of step S3313 is executed, the variation command and the type command are output in step S3314. Execute the process to set the target. The processes of steps S3315 and S3316 are the same as the processes of steps S2013 and S2014. As a result, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the general figure main fluctuation is short, the general figure sub fluctuation corresponding to the general figure main fluctuation is terminated, and the fluctuation command and type command for special figure sub fluctuation are It will be output to the control device 300 side.

The process on the side of the sound and light control device 300 by receiving the variation command and the type command for the special figure sub variation is the same as that of the first embodiment. That is, after performing the processes of steps S2101 to 2110 in the effect determination process (FIG. 34), the processes of steps S1408 to S1420 in the effect determination process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment are performed. As a result, if the normal figure sub-variation that is being executed has been completed without receiving the ceiling replacement command, based on the received special figure variation command and type command, the game as special figure sub-variation Times are executed.

By doing so, a negative determination event does not occur in step S1603 in the timing-based symbol replacement process (FIG. 28) or step S2205 in the effect replacement process (FIG. 35), and the game time corresponding to the ceiling is long-term. It is possible to reduce a feeling of fatigue due to being played over a period of time, and a feeling of strangeness that the game times once thought to have ended are played again.

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined period is not limited to the period corresponding to the stop of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, for example, if the period corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, at least the symbol It is not necessary to change the column Z3 again to generate the reach display, and it is possible to enhance the effect of reducing the discomfort.

Further, when the remaining variation display time of the general figure sub-variation being executed is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 30 sec), the variation display time on the special figure side is set to the remaining variation of the general figure sub-variation. The special figure variation time corresponding to the support mode may be used instead of the display time. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The flowchart of FIG. 57 shows a process executed instead of the acquired information setting process in the second embodiment.

That is, similar to the processes of steps S2001 to S2004, after the processes of steps S3401 to S3404 are executed, a process of grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal figure main fluctuation is executed in step S3405. In the following step S3405, it is determined based on the processing result of step S3405 whether or not the remaining remaining variable display time is longer than a predetermined period. If it is longer than the predetermined period, in step S3407, a process of grasping the special figure variation time corresponding to the support mode is executed. If it is less than the predetermined period in step S3406, or after the process of step S3407 is executed, the special figure stop result is grasped in step S3408, and the time grasped in step S3405 or step S3407 is grasped in step S3409. Execute the process to set the figure tokuden timer counter. The processing of steps S3408 to S3415 is the same as the processing of steps S2009 to S2014.

Accordingly, when the remaining variation display time of the general figure sub-variation in execution is longer than the predetermined period, the special figure variation time corresponding to the support mode is set. In this case, on the sound and light control device 300 side, in step S2114 of the effect determination process (FIG. 34), the number of game times (general figure sub fluctuation) being executed is set to be the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode. The changing process of the variable display time is executed.

By doing so, when the remaining variation display time of the general figure sub-variation being executed is too long, it is possible to promptly notify the result of judgment on the special figure side. As a result, it becomes possible to quickly shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and a smooth game can be realized.

(11) The replacement process (the replacement process of the jackpot dummy) similar to the effect replacement process (FIG. 26, FIG. 35) by the sound and light control device 300 may be performed in addition to the game times corresponding to the ceiling. That is, even in a game game that does not correspond to the ceiling, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are re-varied with a predetermined probability. As a result, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again, the player can be expected to correspond to the ceiling.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the special electric winning device 32 may be provided in the left side area PE2 or the lower side area PE4. By doing so, it is possible to win the through gate 35A (special accessory 33) even during the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to advance the count up to the ceiling (first universal figure winning counter).

(13) In the first to third embodiments, the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side in the game times corresponding to the ceiling is changed in the lottery result display section 37 (particularly the first special figure display section 38a). By matching the end timing of the above, the finish timing of the effect on the side of the symbol display device 42 and the transition timing to the opening/closing execution mode are matched, but if the player does not feel uncomfortable, one of them is compared with the other. It may be set to be slightly earlier or slightly later.

(14) In the first and second embodiments, the effect when the effect on the symbol display device 42 side is replaced is not limited to the above. In short, the effect pattern before and after the replacement can be associated with or replaced by the configuration in which the effect pattern after the replacement is determined based on at least the information (address As(1) to As(x)) of the effect pattern before the replacement. It is possible to do not associate front and back production.

(15) In the fourth embodiment, the distribution table for the second special figure, which is referred to when the second special winning opening 253 is won, may be configured to be substantially distributed to the result B. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the gambling motivation without extremely increasing the ball launch rate.

However, in order to increase the possibility that a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a substantial condominium as the numerical value of the first general-purpose prize winning counter is farther from the ceiling, a second table than the sorting table for the first special map is used. It is better to set the distribution table for special maps so that the probability of being actually distributed to the result B is lower.

(16) In the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure may be reversed. Specifically, the distribution table for the first special map has a higher probability of being distributed to the actual hit result A than the distribution table for the second special map, and the distribution table for the second special map is higher. The probability of being actually distributed to the result B is higher than that of the distribution table for the first special diagram. In this way, the probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is low, and the shift to the high frequency supporting mode is based on the winning of the first special winning opening 52. The probability increases. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, how the distribution determination based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 cannot be effectively distributed to the result B, that is, how to reach the ceiling early, is the high-frequency support mode. Is the key to continue. Therefore, in order to advance only the actual count up to the ceiling, the player is considered to further win the through gate 35A (special accessory 33) in a situation where the number of reserves on the second special map side is the upper limit number. In such a situation, it is possible to encourage the continuous launch of the game ball.

(17) In the fourth embodiment, a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times may be provided. Even in this case, in order to achieve the effect of not raising the ball launch rate too much, at least the configuration that can shift to the low frequency support mode after reaching the ceiling, that is, in the distribution table for the first special diagram, With the configuration in which the hit result B is distributed, the continuation of the high-frequency support mode can be substantially suppressed by the number of times of passing through the through gate 35A instead of the number of game times. However, in order to realize the game property of adjusting the firing operation of the game ball according to the relationship between the prescribed number of terminations and the ceiling, which is shown in the fourth embodiment, the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times is set. Must have been

(18) In the fourth embodiment, the ceiling function of the special accessory 33 is used to make it more meaningful to win a prize when the number of reserves on the second special map side is the upper limit number. May be realized by internal control of the gaming machine or the like. That is, for example, a starting ball entering portion is provided in the game area PE, and special information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired with the specified number as an upper limit based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering portion. In a configuration in which the player is provided with a privilege by the opening/closing execution mode or the like when the information corresponds to the jackpot winning, when the number of balls entering the starting ball entering part reaches the number corresponding to the ceiling, As long as the player is provided with a privilege regardless of the special information, it is possible to give the player the meaning to enter the starting entrance section even if the number of the special information is a prescribed number. ..

(19) In the first to third embodiments, the number of passages to the through gate 35A and the number of game times executed up to the ceiling may be matched. Examples of the matching configuration include, for example, a structure in which a holding area capable of storing holding information for a general-purpose figure is provided more than the number of ceilings, and a lid or the like may be provided so as not to win the through gate 35A during execution of the general-purpose figure sub-variation. A configuration in which animals are provided is conceivable.

(20) In the first embodiment, the variation display time of the game time (general figure sub-variation) being executed is extended or shortened according to the variation display time of the special figure main variation. It may be configured such that the variable display time of the game times is not extended or shortened. If it is configured not to extend the variation display time of the game times being executed, the game times being executed will end corresponding to the jackpot result before the special figure main fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation display of the game times being executed will be displayed. If the time is not shortened, the game time being executed ends after the special figure main fluctuation ends, in association with the jackpot result. Therefore, the end timing of the variable display of the special figure display unit 38 and the symbol display device 42 is displaced, but in the relationship with the opening/closing execution mode, for example, in the opening/closing execution mode, after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, By adjusting the opening period until the opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is started, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player. In this case, if the sub fluctuation ends before the special drawing main fluctuation, the above opening period is continued until the special drawing main fluctuation ends, and if the sub fluctuation ends after the special drawing main fluctuation It is advisable to continue the opening period until the fluctuation ends.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode on the ceiling (winning into the special winning opening 52), it is necessary to switch the firing mode of the firing operation device 28. Therefore, in the sound/light control device 300, an effect for instructing the player to perform such switching (for example, right-handed, and displayed on the display screen 42a) is performed by the opening effect. Therefore, even if the opening period is extended as described above, the player feels the annoyance that the period from the notification of the jackpot result to the start of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 becomes long. Can be suppressed.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound/light control device 300 may be configured to be able to grasp the number of times up to the ceiling. With this configuration, the main controller 71 issues a command for grasping the numerical value of the first universal prize winning counter every time the first universal prize winning counter is updated in the main controller 71 and when the power is turned on. It may be configured to output to the control device 300.

In this pachinko machine 10, the power supply and the backup power supply from the firing control device 78 store and retain the numerical value (the number of times to the ceiling) of the first universal winning prize counter of the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 even when the power is off. .. On the other hand, in the sound and light control device 300, the number of times up to the ceiling is not stored and held when the power is off. Therefore, for example, when the sound/light control device 300 notifies the number of times to the ceiling or changes the effect contents (for example, the background image of the display screen 42a) depending on the number of stays, the sound/light control is performed when the power is turned on. The device 300 needs to know the number of times to the ceiling. Therefore, the significance of the above configuration arises.

(22) In the special accessory 33, a passage portion into which a game ball can enter is provided in addition to the ball passage opening 33a, and the game ball passing through the passage portion may be led out in the middle of the first passage 51a. Good. In this case, since the distribution board 54 is operated by the game balls that have passed through this passage portion, the number of times up to the ceiling will be switched midway, so that it is possible to diversify the game.

Further, for example, if a game ball rolling on a stage provided below the display screen 42a is led out to this passage portion by a warp passage or the like, for a player visually recognizing the display screen 42a, Since the rolling game ball is also in the field of view, in addition to the game of confirming the effect contents of the display screen 42a, a new game of confirming the motion of the game ball rolling on this stage is added, and the interest is improved. Is more preferable from the viewpoint.

(23) In the above second and third embodiments, the special figure is changed at the timing when the change on the special figure side ends according to the remaining change display time on the general figure side during execution. Although the change is determined so that it will also end, the change display time on the special map side is set to Any configuration may be used as long as it is determined according to the operating status.

For example, in the acquisition information setting process (FIGS. 33 and 40) in the main control device 71, the remaining variation display time of the general figure main variation is grasped (step S2005, step S2504, step S2506), and the special figure special power timer counter. In the setting process (step S2008, step S2510), the set time may be set longer or shorter than the grasped time. If it is set to be set for a long time, after the variable display of the symbols ends on the symbol display device 42, the variable display on the special symbol display unit 38 ends, so that as a player, the symbol display device 42 rather than the special symbol display unit 38. The result of judgment on the special drawing side can be grasped by, and as a result, the degree of attention to the symbol display device 42 can be increased. On the other hand, if the configuration is set to be short, the variable display on the special symbol display unit 38 ends before the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 42 ends. The opening/closing control of 32 can be started. Therefore, before the notification on the side of the symbol display device 42, it is possible to realize a surprising effect that the winning result is notified by another accessory (special electric prize winning device 32). In this configuration, in order to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention on the side of the symbol display device 42, for example, it may be set with a predetermined probability to be shorter than the remaining variation display time of the main figure variation.

Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of reservation information on the special figure side can be stored as in the third embodiment, the variable display time on the special figure side is changed depending on the number of reservation information on the general figure side stored at the time of winning the special figure. The configuration may be determined. In this case, the fluctuation display time table on the special figure side corresponding to the number of holding information is stored in the ROM 83 in advance, and the number of holding information on the general figure side and the fluctuation are stored in the acquired information setting process in the main control device 71. The variable display time on the special drawing side may be determined by referring to the display time table. When this configuration is adopted in the third embodiment, the variation display time on the universal figure side is set as a fixed period regardless of the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2. Then, the process of step S2507 in the acquisition information setting process (FIG. 40) of the main controller 71 is performed by using the number of pieces of pending information up to the area whose ceiling information is confirmed in step S2505 and the variable display time table. Change to the process of grasping the variable display time of the hold information including the hold information corresponding to the information. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the configuration in which the variable display time of the hold information is grasped.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

Note that the following characteristic group A is "as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry portion provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device. It is known that the variable display is displayed, and when the winning result is obtained by the lottery, the combination of the specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the special game state advantageous to the player is entered. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175.) In such a gaming machine, if a period during which no ball enters the above-mentioned ball-in section continues for a long time, a special game state is set during that period. Not only the transition lottery is not performed, but the variable display on the display screen is not performed, which may reduce interest in the game. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in increasing the attention to the game.” This was done in consideration of the technical background and issues.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a gaming ball to the gaming area (gaming area PE),
A first ball entrance portion (special winning opening 52) provided in the game area, into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, a transition determining means (a special controller by the main control device 71) that determines whether or not to transition the game state to a special state advantageous to the player. Function to execute the judgment process on the figure side),
When the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit is a transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the special state, the special state transition unit (the special control by the main control device 71) for transitioning the game state to the special state The function to execute the process during figure confirmation),
Display means for executing a predetermined display effect (symbol display device 42),
Based on the transition determination made by the transition determining means, the game reusing operation is started in the display means, and the game revolving operation is ended with a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining. A first game time execution means (function of executing effect determination processing by the sound and light control device 300),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area, in addition to the first ball entering section, a second ball entering section (through gate 35A) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided,
The shift determination means does not perform the shift determination based on the entry into the second entry portion,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball-in portion, the game game operation is started on the display means, and the game game operation is ended with a predetermined stop result. Means and
While the second game time execution means is executing the game use operation, the game use operation corresponds to the determination result of the transfer determination based on that the transfer determination is made by the transfer determination means. A game time replacement means (a function for executing the effect replacement process by the sound and light control device 300) for replacing the game playing operation being executed so as to become the game playing operation.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, the transition determination is performed based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, the game diverting operation is performed on the display means, and the determination result of the transition determination is the transfer correspondence result. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special state that is advantageous to the player in some cases, the game replay operation is also performed based on the entry into the second entry portion. That is, since the game revolving operation is performed not only based on the first ball entering portion but also on the second ball entering portion, the game revolving operation is performed based only on the first ball entering portion. As a result, game diversion operations are frequently performed. With such a configuration, even if the period in which the first ball entering portion does not occur continues for a long time, the display means displays the game time based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion. Since the use operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

However, in such a configuration, when a ball entering the first ball entering portion occurs during execution of the game playing operation based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion, a request for the game playing operation is requested. Will be duplicated. That is, the game rejuvenation operation is performed so that a predetermined stop result is obtained based on the entry into the second entry portion, and in this situation, the determination of the transition determination based on the entry into the first entry portion The request for the game diversion operation that results in the stop result corresponding to the result is duplicated.

And since the game reusing operation based on the entry into the first entry portion reflects the result of the transition determination and is involved in the profit of the player, the determination result regarding the profit (transition response result ) Occurs, it is necessary to inform the player of the determination result without delaying the return of the profit. That is, even though the gaming machine is already in a state of returning profits (in the stage before the transition to the special state), an operation unrelated to it is endlessly performed as a game reusing operation. Is not preferable. Because, if you do not notify it even though you are in the special state, only the player who knows that you have transitioned to the special state can benefit from the special state. This makes it difficult to secure

Therefore, in this gaming machine, in such a case, the above-described inconvenience is eliminated by replacing the game diversion operation being executed with the game diversion operation corresponding to the result of the transition determination, and the game diversion operation is eliminated. The effect of the frequently performed configuration can be suitably achieved.

Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature A2. An informing means (lottery result display section 37) which is provided separately from the above-mentioned displaying means and which executes a predetermined informing
On the basis of the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, the variable display is started by the notification means, and the variable display is stopped with a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination. A function of executing a special figure special electric power control process by the main control device 71),
Equipped with
When the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the special state transition means sets the game state to the special state after or at the same time when the variation display in the notification means by the variation display means is stopped. To move to
When the game-replacement operation is replaced by the game-replacement means, the game-reuse operation after the replacement is ended in accordance with the timing at which the operation is stopped by the variable display means. Setting means (in the first embodiment, a function for performing the effect replacement process by the sound and light control device 300, and in the second and third embodiments, steps S2005 to S2008 and step S2504 by the main control device 71. , A function of executing the processing of step S2509 and step S2510), the gaming machine described in the characteristic A1.

According to the above configuration, the determination result of the transition determination unit is notified by the notification unit separately from the display unit. If the determination result is a shift correspondence result, the gaming state shifts to the special state after or at the same time when the variable display of the notification means is stopped. In this case, the game playing operation on the display means side can be replaced by the game playing replacement means, but the variable display on the notification means side cannot be replaced. Therefore, in the case where the results of the transition determination associated with the entry into the first entry portion are displayed on the display means and the notification means, respectively, if the timing of stopping each of these displays deviates, the effect continues. However, it may be in a special state, and it is considered that a player looking at each of these displays feels uncomfortable or otherwise inconvenient.

That is, for example, if the display stop timing of the display means is too early with respect to the notification stop timing of the notification means, there is a fear that not only the display means but also the player watching the notification means may be annoyed that the display is not made. .. Conversely, if the notification stop timing of the notification means is too early with respect to the display stop timing of the display means, the result of the transition determination is known before the display stop of the display means, and the display stop of the display means is waited for. May be distracting.

Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention without causing such an inconvenience.

Features A3. The setting means shortens the remaining operation period of the game turn operation by the second game time execution means being executed, according to the period from the start of the variable display in the notification means to the stop thereof, or The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is provided with a means for extending (a function of executing the processing of steps S1501 to S1504 and step S1506 by the sound and light control device 300).

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature A2 can be achieved without changing the period of the variable display on the notification means side when the game turning operation is changed by the game time changing means.

In particular, with such a configuration, the period from the start of the variable display in the notification means to the stop can be set in advance regardless of replacement by the game time replacement means, and replacement is frequent. Since the preset period can be used in the game reusing operation which is not performed, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

Features A4. The setting means sets the period from the start of the variable display in the informing means to the stop thereof to be the remaining operation period of the game turning operation by the second game time executing means being executed. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, which is provided with a means (a function of executing the processes of Step S2005, Step S2008, and Step S2012 by the main control device 71).

According to the above-mentioned configuration, when replacing the game-reproducing operation by the game-replacement means, the effect of feature A2 can be achieved without changing the operation period of the game-reproducing operation on the display means side.

In particular, with such a configuration, since the operation period on the display means side does not change, it is possible to prevent the game repetitive operation from being lengthened for a very long time at the time of replacement, and reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player. You can

Features A5. The second ball entering portion is configured to allow a game ball to pass in the game area,
The first ball entering portion is provided at a position where the game ball can enter by passing the game ball through the second ball entering portion,
The operation for game use by the second game time executing means has an operation period longer than a period required for a game ball that has passed through the second ball entering portion to enter the first ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, which includes:

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the first ball entering portion, the game ball may have passed through the second ball entering portion at a timing earlier than that. .. Then, the game diverting operation by the second game time executing means includes one whose operation period is longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the second ball entering portion to enter the first ball entering portion. Therefore, as described above, at the time when the game ball that has passed through the second ball entering portion enters the first ball entering portion, the game diversion operation based on the passage of the second ball entering portion is not completed. Sometimes. In such a case, the request for the game turning operation is duplicated as described above, but since the game turning operation is replaced as shown in the characteristic A1, the effect shown in the characteristic A1 can be obtained. You can

Features A6. The game ball, which is provided in a ball passage area that allows passage of a game ball from the second ball entering part to the first ball entering part, and which has passed through the second ball entering part, is transferred to the first ball entering part. Characteristic A5 characterized by including a distribution means (distribution plate 54) for distributing to either a first passage for entering a ball or a second passage for not entering the first ball portion. Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game balls that have passed through the second ball entrance section are allowed to enter the first ball entrance section by the distribution means. Therefore, it is possible to enter the first ball entering portion by passing through the second ball entering portion, but all of the balls enter the first ball entering portion even though passing through the second ball entering portion. This does not mean that it is possible to cause a case in which the game-replacement operation can be replaced by the game-replacement means and a case in which it cannot be replaced. This makes it possible to diversify the effect.

Features A7. The distribution means is characterized in that the distribution means shifts to a state in which the game balls are inserted into the first ball entering part as a predetermined number of game balls pass through the second ball entering part. The gaming machine described in A6.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, the distribution means shifts to a state in which the game balls are allowed to enter the first ball entering portion as the predetermined number of game balls pass through the second ball entering portion. That is, in order to enter the game ball into the first ball entering portion and receive the transition determination, it is a condition that a predetermined number of game balls pass through the second ball entering portion. In this case, it is considered that the player playing the present gaming machine actively continues the game in the expectation that some benefit will be obtained by passing the predetermined number of game balls in the second ball entering portion. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and eventually to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

Feature A8. Grasping means (for example, the main control device 71) that grasps to which passage of the first passage and the second passage the game ball is distributed when the game ball passes through the second ball entering portion. Function for executing the processing of step S1710) according to
When the game ball that has passed through the second ball entering portion is distributed to the first passage and is grasped by the grasping device, the second game is started before the game reusing operation is started by the first game time executing device. An end limiting unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S1712 and S1906 by the main control unit 71) for limiting the end of the game turning operation by the game number executing unit, A6 or The game machine according to feature A7.

According to the above configuration, when entering the first ball entering portion, the end of the game turning operation by the second game time executing means is limited. As a result, there is no event in which the game-replacement operation being executed is terminated before the game-replacement means replaces the game-reuse operation.

That is, if it is understood that the game balls that have passed through the second ball entering portion are distributed to the first passage, then at that time, the second game time executing means has started the game use operation (in progress). If there is), then even if the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, the second game playing operation is performed without executing the game playing operation corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entering portion. It may end. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, in such a case, the end limiter restricts the end of the game turn operation by the second game time executing means being executed, so that the game time changing means can play the game. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that there is no target game diversion operation even though the diversion operation is to be replaced.

Feature A9. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion, an advantage judgment is made as to whether or not the game state is shifted to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player and is more disadvantageous than the special state. Advantageous determination means (a function of executing the acceptance/rejection determination processing on the universal figure side by the main control device 71),
Advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state when the determination result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous correspondence result corresponding to shifting to the advantageous state (universal figure by the main controller 71) Function to execute processing during confirmation),
Equipped with
The second game time execution means starts the game time operation on the display means based on the advantage determination made by the advantage determination means, and makes a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the advantage determination. The game machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, characterized in that the game reusing operation is ended.

According to the above configuration, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering portion, at least the advantage determination is made although the transition determination is not made, so the game reusing operation without the transition determination is performed. In this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention. However, since the special state is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player is more interested in whether or not to shift to the special state than the advantageous state, and is described in the characteristic A1. As described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game reusing operation that does not involve the transition determination, while leaving the significance of replacing the game reusing operation.

Feature A10. In the case where the determination result of the advantage determination that triggered the game use operation in the game use operation by the second game time execution means is the advantage correspondence result, The gaming machine according to Feature A9, which is provided with a replacement limiting unit (for example, a function of executing the process of step S1414 by the sound and light control device 300) that does not replace the game replay operation that is being performed.

According to the above configuration, when the determination result of the advantage determination based on the entry into the second entry portion is the advantage correspondence result, it overlaps with the request for the game diversion operation due to the transition determination being performed. Even in such cases, the advantage judgment is prioritized. By doing so, it is possible to make the game diverting operation based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion more effective.

Feature A11. An operation mode determination means (for example, a function of executing the processing of steps S1404 and S1414 by the sound and light control device 300) for determining an operation mode (effect pattern) when the game reusing operation is performed,
The operation mode determining means, based on the operation mode of the game turning operation by the second game time executing means being executed, when the game turning operation is replaced by the game turning operation, Features A1 to A1, which are provided with means for determining an operation mode of the game turn operation by the first game time execution means after replacement (function of executing effect replacement processing by the sound and light control device 300). The gaming machine according to any one of A10.

According to the above configuration, the operation mode of the game use operation by the second game time executing means that is being executed and the operation mode after the replacement are executed as a series of operations with a predetermined relationship (regularity). It is possible to make the player have a great interest (in other words, a sense of expectation) about what is replaced with what, unlike the case where the replacement is performed without such a relationship.

Feature A12. The operation mode determination means, when at least the game time replacement means replaces the game time operation, the operation mode of the game time operation by the first game time execution means after replacement, The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that the operating mode is determined so as to be a continuous operating mode from the operating mode of the game playing operation by the second game time executing means being executed.

According to the above configuration, when the game reusing operation is replaced, it is replaced so that it becomes a continuous operation mode from the operation mode that has been performed until then. Therefore, the game diversion operation that has been performed up to that point is not wasted, and it is possible to reduce the player's feeling that the effect so far is felt to be empty. Further, by doing this, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when the replacement is performed.

In addition, "the operation mode of the game use operation by the first game time executing means after replacement is a continuous operation mode from the operation mode of the game use operation by the second game time executing means being executed" Includes, for example, the same character continues to produce the same appearance, or the same story-oriented production continues.

Features A13. The operation mode determining means executes the operation mode of the game turning operation by the first game time executing means after the replacement, at least when the game turning operation is replaced by the game turning operation. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the operating mode is determined such that the operating mode is not continuous from the operating mode of the game playing operation by the second game time executing means.

According to the above configuration, when the game reusing operation is replaced, it is replaced so that it becomes an operation mode that is not continuous from the operation mode that has been performed until then. Therefore, it is easy for the player to notice that the game diversion operation has been replaced, and it is expected that the determination result is the transition response result after recognizing that the transition determination has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect that is replaced with the discontinuous operation mode in this way.

In addition, the "operation mode of the game mode operation by the first game time execution means after replacement is not continuous from the operation mode of the game time operation by the second game time execution means during execution" , That the characters appearing in the effect are changed, the format is changed, and different story-like effects are performed.

Feature A14. The game diverting operation is to start the variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display means, and display the variable display of the plurality of patterns as a stop result or a predetermined stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination. When the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result, the reach pattern combination in which a predetermined pattern combination may be established is stopped and displayed. By making the reach state, by performing the reach variation (reach display) in the reach state, after that, the reach variation is ended by a combination of the predetermined patterns,
It is provided with determination means for determining whether or not the variable display of each pattern is being performed,
The game time replacement means, at the time when the transfer determination is made by the transfer determination means during the execution of the game use operation by the second game time execution means, all the respective patterns by the determination means. When it is determined that the variable display (high-speed change) is being performed, the stop variation of each of the patterns in the variable display is replaced so that the reach variation is performed, and one of the patterns is determined by the determination means. If it is determined that the variation display of No. 1 has been completed or the preparation operation before stopping (low speed fluctuation) has been completed, the variation display is completed or the pattern that has been transferred to the preparation operation is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13, wherein the variable display is performed again and the stop pattern of the design is replaced so that the reach variation is performed.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, when the game diverting operation is replaced, even if the game diverting operation in execution is not scheduled to perform the reach varying, the reach varying can be performed. That is, when the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the reach variation ends with a combination of predetermined patterns, and as a premise, it is preferable that each pattern is in the reach state. Then, when the game diversion operation being executed is not scheduled to change the reach, there is a possibility that each pattern is stopped without reaching the reach state. Therefore, it is determined by the determination means whether or not the variable display of each pattern is being performed, and if all the patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, the stopped patterns themselves of those patterns are replaced, and then the reach change is performed as the reach state. If any of the symbols are stopped or the preparatory operation before stopping is changed, it is changed and displayed again, and the stop pattern is replaced so that the reach state is reached. As described above, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused when the reach state is not reached. Furthermore, when the stop pattern is replaced in this way, the effects before that are not wasted when the game reusing operation is replaced, and it is possible to reduce the player's feeling that the effects up to that point are empty. can do. In addition, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness when it is replaced.

<Feature B group>
In addition, the following characteristic B group is "as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered a ball entering portion provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device. It is known that the variable display is displayed, and when the winning result is obtained by the lottery, the combination of the specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the special game state advantageous to the player is entered. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175.) If a period in which no ball enters the above-mentioned ball entry portion continues for a long time, not only the lottery for shifting to the special game state is not performed during the period. Since there is no variable display on the display screen, interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention to the game." It has been done.

Feature B1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a gaming ball to the gaming area (gaming area PE),
A first ball entrance portion (special winning opening 52) provided in the game area, into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, a transition determining means (a special controller by the main control device 71) that determines whether or not to transition the game state to a special state advantageous to the player. Function to execute the judgment process on the figure side),
When the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit is a transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the special state, the special state transition unit (the special control by the main control device 71) for transitioning the game state to the special state The function to execute the process during figure confirmation),
Display means for executing a predetermined display effect (symbol display device 42),
Based on the transition determination made by the transition determining means, the game reusing operation is started in the display means, and the game revolving operation is ended with a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining. A first game time execution means (a function for executing the effect determination process by the sound and light control device 300),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area, in addition to the first ball entering section, a second ball entering section (through gate 35A) into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters is provided,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion, the game game operation is started in the display means, and the game game operation is ended with a predetermined stop result and the game game operation is executed. Equipped with means,
The first ball entering section is provided at a position where the game ball can enter the game ball when the game ball enters the second ball entering section.
Grasping means for recognizing whether or not the game ball that has entered the second ball-entering part then enters the first ball-entering part (step by the main controller 71 in the second and third embodiments) S1710 to step S1714 and the function of executing the processing of step S2311 to step S2314),
Based on the fact that the grasping means has grasped that the game ball that has entered the second ball-entering portion has entered the first ball-entering portion, the operation for game use by the second game time executing means is Game destination execution means (step S1812 or step S2413 by the main controller 71 in the second and third embodiments) that executes a process to start as the game turning operation corresponding to the entry into the first entry portion. Function that executes the processing of
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic B1, the transition determination is performed based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the game diverting operation is performed on the display means, and the determination result of the transition determination is the transfer correspondence result. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special state that is advantageous to the player in some cases, the game replay operation is also performed based on the entry into the second entry portion. That is, since the game revolving operation is performed not only based on the first ball entering portion but also on the second ball entering portion, the game revolving operation is performed based only on the first ball entering portion. As a result, game diversion operations are frequently performed. With such a configuration, even if the period in which the first ball entering portion does not occur continues for a long time, the display means displays the game time based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion. Since the use operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

However, the first ball entering portion is provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion can enter, and in such a configuration, the game based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion. When a ball enters the first ball entering portion during execution of the diversion operation, the game diversion operation requests are duplicated. That is, the game rejuvenation operation is performed so that a predetermined stop result is obtained based on the entry into the second entry portion, and in this situation, the determination of the transition determination based on the entry into the first entry portion The request for the game diversion operation that results in the stop result corresponding to the result is duplicated.

And since the game reusing operation based on the entry into the first entry portion reflects the result of the transition determination and is involved in the profit of the player, the determination result regarding the profit (transition response result ) Occurs, it is necessary to inform the player of the determination result without delaying the return of the profit. That is, even though the gaming machine is already in a state of returning profits (in the stage before the transition to the special state), as the game diversion operation, operations unrelated to it are endlessly performed. Is not preferable. Because, if you do not notify it even though you are in the special state, only the player who knows that you have transitioned to the special state can benefit from the special state. This makes it difficult to secure

Therefore, in this gaming machine, in such a case, when the grasping means grasps that the game ball entering the second ball entering portion enters the first ball entering portion, the second game time executing means Start the game re-use operation as a game re-use operation corresponding to entering the first ball entering part (before entering the second ball entering part and before entering the first ball entering part) It is configured to do. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience does not occur, and the effect of the configuration in which the game reusing operation is frequently performed can be suitably exerted.

Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature B2. An informing means (lottery result display section 37) which is provided separately from the above-mentioned displaying means and executes a predetermined informing;
On the basis of the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, the variable display is started by the notification means, and the variable display is stopped with a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination. A function of executing a special figure special electric power control process by the main control device 71),
Equipped with
When the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the special state transition means sets the game state to the special state after or at the same time when the variation display in the notification means by the variation display means is stopped. To move to
Setting means for setting, when the game turning operation is started by the game turn destination executing means, to stop the fluctuation display by the fluctuation display means at the timing when the started game turning operation ends. The feature B1 is characterized in that the main controller 71 in the second and third embodiments has a function of executing the processes of steps S2005 to S2008, step S2504, step S2509, and step S2510. Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, the determination result of the transition determination unit is notified by the notification unit separately from the display unit. If the determination result is a shift correspondence result, the gaming state shifts to the special state after or at the same time when the variable display of the notification means is stopped. In this case, the game playing operation on the display means side may be started by the game time destination executing means at the timing before the shift determination, but the variable display on the notification means side is started based on the shift determination being made. It Therefore, in the case where the results of the transition determination associated with the entry into the first entry portion are displayed on the display means and the notification means, respectively, if the timing of stopping each of these displays deviates, the effect continues. However, it may be in a special state, and it is considered that a player looking at each of these displays feels uncomfortable or otherwise inconvenient.

That is, for example, if the display stop timing of the display means is too early with respect to the notification stop timing of the notification means, there is a fear that not only the display means but also the player watching the notification means may be annoyed that the display is not made. .. Conversely, if the notification stop timing of the notification means is too early with respect to the display stop timing of the display means, the result of the transition determination is known before the display stop of the display means, and the display stop of the display means is waited for. May be distracting.

Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention without causing such an inconvenience.

Feature B3. The setting means sets the period from the start of the variable display in the notification means to the stop thereof to the remaining operation period of the game turning operation by the second game time execution means at the start of the variable display. The gaming machine described in the feature B2, which is provided with a unit (a function of the main controller 71 that executes the processes of steps S2005, S2008, and S2012).

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature B2 can be obtained without changing the variable display period on the display unit side.

In particular, with such a configuration, one game playing operation is extremely prolonged in order to match the end timing of the game playing operation on the display means side with the end timing of the variable display on the notification means side. It is possible to reduce the feeling of strangeness given to the player.

Feature B4. The game time destination executing means, when the game ball entered in the second ball entering section enters the first ball entering section, is grasped by the grasping means, the game by the second game time executing means When the diversion operation is performed, the game diversion operation by the second game time execution means is changed to the game diversion operation corresponding to the determination result of the shift determination without starting the game diversion operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, which is provided with a means for replacing (a function of executing the processing of step S1713 by the main control device 71 and step S2110 by the sound and light control device 300).

According to the above configuration, when the grasping means recognizes that the player will enter the first ball entering portion, if the game playing operation is being performed by the second game time executing means, the game time destination executing means is The game diversion operation cannot be started. Therefore, the game use operation by the second game time executing means is replaced so as to correspond to the result of the shift determination. By doing this, when the game balls successively enter the second ball entering section, when the subsequent game ball enters the first ball entering section, the result of the transition determination is given first. It is possible to notify the player without waiting for the end of the game round operation (the game round operation by the second game round execution means) triggered by the entry into the second ball entry section.

Feature B5. The game time destination executing means, when the game ball entered in the second ball entering section enters the first ball entering section, is grasped by the grasping means, the game by the second game time executing means When the diversion operation is being performed, the end restriction means for restricting the end of the game diversion operation by the second game time execution means before the start of the game diversion operation by the first game time execution means ( The game machine according to feature B4, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of step S1712 and step S1906 by the main control device 71.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the feature B4, when entering the first entering portion, the end of the game turning operation by the second game time executing means is limited. As a result, there is no event that the game game operation being executed ends before the game game operation stop result is replaced as the stop result corresponding to the transition determination result.

That is, when it is determined that the game ball that has entered the second ball entering section will enter the first ball entering section, since the game rounding operation by the second game time executing means is being performed at that time, The game turn destination execution means cannot start the game turn operation. In this case, even if the game ball enters the first ball entering section thereafter, there is a risk that the second game diversion operation will end. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned configuration, in such a case, the end limiting means limits the end of the game turning operation by the second game time executing means being executed, so replace the game turning operation. In spite of this, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that there is no target game diversion operation.

Feature B6. The game turn destination execution means executes the game turn operation so that the game turn operation has a stop result (stop result corresponding to the jackpot result) corresponding to the determination result of the shift determination by the shift determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, even if the game turn destination executing means performs the game turning operation before the shift determination of the shift determining means, the game turning operation can be suitably performed. That is, at the time when the game turn destination executing means starts the game turning operation, the shift determining means has not made the shift determination, but as shown by the feature B1, the game turn destination executing means has not made the shift determination. The game diversion operation is started before the shift determination as the game diversion operation corresponding to. Further, in the above configuration, the subsequent stop result is also started as corresponding to the shift determination. That is, before the shift determination of the shift determination means, the determination result is first determined by a fixed hit, and the game diverting operation is started as the corresponding stop result. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the game reversing operation corresponding to the transition determination is started and ended before the transition determination.

Feature B7. The stop result of the game turning operation started by the game turn destination executing means is a stop result when the determination result of the shift determination by the shift determining means is the shift corresponding result. A gaming machine described in Feature B6.

According to the above configuration, the game turn destination executing means starts the game turn operation so that the shift correspondence result is the stop result. In this case, although there is a possibility that the result of the transition determination performed by the subsequent transition determination means will not be the transition response result, the player expects that it is the transition response result, and pays attention to such game reusing operation. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the winning probability of the migration determination by the migration determining unit is 50% or more.

According to the above configuration, since 50% or more of the transition determination result is the transition response result, when the game destination execution means starts the game reusing operation, the transition response result of the transition response result is irrespective of the transition determination of the transition response result. Even if the game diverting operation is started so that the stop result is obtained, it is possible to reduce the number of events that do not result in the transition correspondence result thereafter. As a result, it is possible to reduce the phenomenon that the stop result of the game diversion operation corresponds to the transition response result, but the determination result of the transition determination means does not actually shift to the special state unlike the transition response result. can do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce confusion and discouragement given to the player.

The higher the winning probability of the transfer determination, the better, and more preferably 100%.

Feature B9. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion, an advantage determination is made as to whether or not to shift the game state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and is more disadvantageous than the special state. Advantageous determination means (a function of executing the acceptance/rejection determination processing on the universal figure side by the main control device 71),
Advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state when the determination result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous correspondence result corresponding to shifting to the advantageous state (universal figure by the main controller 71) Function to execute processing during confirmation),
Equipped with
The second game time executing means, when the grasping means grasps that the game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion does not enter the first ball entering portion, the advantage determining means causes the advantage On the basis of the fact that the advantage judgment is made, the game-use operation is started on the display means, and the game-use operation is ended with a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the advantage judgment. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering portion, at least the advantage determination is made although the transition determination is not made, so that the game diversion operation without the transition determination is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention in the case of being referred to. However, since the special state is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player is more interested in whether or not to shift to the special state than the advantageous state, and is described in the feature B1. As described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game turn operation that does not involve the shift determination, while leaving the significance of starting the game turn operation as the one corresponding to the shift determination by the game turn destination executing means. ..

Feature B10. When it is determined by the grasping device that the player will enter the first ball-entering portion, it is a state in which the player can enter the first ball-entering portion by the display device or a rendering device other than the display device. Special notification execution means for executing the special notification (function of causing the sound display control device 300 to display the special holding image P3 on the symbol display device 42),
The special notification execution means is means for executing the special notification with a predetermined probability when the grasping means grasps that the player does not enter the first entrance portion (steps S2707 and S2708 by the main control device 71). The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, which is provided with a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that the game ball is entering the first ball entering portion by performing the special notification. In this configuration, the special notification is given with a predetermined probability not only when entering the first ball entering portion but also when not entering the first ball entering portion. It is expected that it will correspond to the entry into the first entry portion. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Feature B11. The game balls that enter the second ball-entering portion are provided in a ball-passing area (game ball-passing area R) where the game balls can pass from the second ball-in portion to the first ball-in portion. , A distribution means for allocating to either a first passage (first passage 51a) for entering the first entrance portion or a second passage (second passage 51b) for not entering the first entrance portion Equipped with (distribution plate 54),
The grasping means grasps to which passage of the first passage and the second passage the game ball is distributed by the distributing means, so that the game ball entering the second ball entering portion is The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, which is for grasping whether or not to enter the first entry portion.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball that has entered the second ball entering section is allowed to enter the first ball entering section by the sorting means. Therefore, although it is possible to enter the first ball entering part by entering the second ball entering part, even if the player enters the second ball entering part, all the balls enter the first ball entering part. It is not a sphere, and causes a case where the second game time execution means performs a game time operation and a case where the game time destination execution means performs a game time operation corresponding to the first ball entering section. be able to. This makes it possible to diversify the effect.

Feature B12. The distribution means is configured to shift to a state in which a game ball is inserted into the first ball entering part as a predetermined number of game balls enter the second ball entering part. The gaming machine described in Feature B11.

According to the above configuration, the allocating means shifts to a state in which the game balls are allowed to enter the first ball entering part when a predetermined number of game balls enter the second ball entering part. .. That is, in order to enter the game ball into the first ball entering portion and receive the transition determination, it is a condition that a predetermined number of game balls are entered in the second ball entering portion. In this case, it is considered that the player who is playing the present gaming machine actively continues the game, expecting that some benefit will be obtained by entering a predetermined number of game balls in the second ball entering section. .. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and eventually to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

<Characteristic C group>
It should be noted that the following characteristic group C is, "As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball launched by a player operating a launcher or the like enters a ball entering portion provided in a game area. Based on the lottery based on the drawing, the variable display of the picture is performed on the display screen of the display device, and when the winning result is obtained by the lottery, the final stop display of the specific picture combination etc. is displayed on the display screen. Along with this, there is known a structure for shifting to a special game state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). The lottery for transitioning to the special game state based on is drawn with a predetermined probability each time a ball is entered in the ball entering section.While this lottery or the variable display corresponding to this lottery is being performed, When a ball enters the ball entering section, the information is generally stored in a predetermined number, and then a lottery or variable display is performed based on the information. If a prescribed number of information corresponding to is already stored, even if a ball enters the ball entering section, the player cannot be drawn to the special game state, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, there is still room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the entertainment of the game.” Therefore, it was made in view of the technical background and problems.

Feature C1. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) when operated by a player,
A ball entry portion (through gate 35A) into which a game ball that is launched by the launch means and flows down the game area can enter.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the game ball enters the entrance portion (function of executing information acquisition processing on the special map side by the main control device 71),
Acquisition information that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number (PS1=1 in the first to third embodiments, PS2=4 in the fourth embodiment) as an upper limit Storage means (function of executing the processing of steps S901 to S905 by the main control device 71 in the first to third embodiments, and processing of steps S2906 to step S2910 by the main control device 71 in the fourth embodiment. Function to execute)
For each special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting the player a first privilege (open/close execution mode of the real win mode based on the real win result A). Whether or not there is a grant is sequentially performed, and when the result of the determination is the grant corresponding result, a first privilege granting unit that grants the first privilege (special transmission by the main controller 71 in the fourth embodiment). Function to execute processing during confirmation),
In a gaming machine equipped with
A game machine provided with means for counting the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion (function of executing the processes of steps S2701 to S2703 by the main controller 71).

According to the characteristic C1, the special information is acquired by inserting the game ball into the entering part, and the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means until the predetermined number is reached. That is, after reaching the predetermined number, the special information is not acquired even if the player enters the ball into the ball entering portion. On the other hand, the counting of the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion is continued even after reaching a predetermined number. Therefore, for example, when the number of entered balls reaches a predetermined specific number, it is possible to perform some processing, and it is possible to cause the game balls to enter the entered ball portion. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of special information has reached the predetermined number, it is possible to improve the interest.

The above-mentioned some kind of processing may be, for example, processing for giving a bonus to the player, or processing for notifying that a specific number has been reached by a predetermined notifying unit.

Feature C2. For each special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the player is given the first privilege (the opening/closing execution mode in the first to third embodiments, and the substantial winning result A in the fourth embodiment). Based on the above, it is determined whether or not it is a granting correspondence result corresponding to granting the substantially permissible mode opening/closing execution mode), and if the judgment result is the granting correspondence result, the first privilege is given. A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a special electric power confirmation in-process by the main control device 71);
When the number of balls entering the ball entering section reaches a specific number (256), the player is given a second privilege (opening/closing execution mode in the first to third embodiments, substantially in the fourth embodiment). A second privilege giving means (a function of realizing a ceiling by the distribution plate 54 of the special accessory 33) for giving an opening/closing execution mode of the actual winning mode based on the winning result A or the actual winning result B). The gaming machine described in the feature C1.

According to the above configuration, since it is possible to determine whether or not the first benefit can be obtained by inserting the game ball into the ball entrance portion, the player allows the game ball to enter the ball entrance portion. In order to operate the firing means. On the other hand, when the special information reaches a predetermined number, the special information is not stored any more. In such a situation, can the first benefit be obtained even if the game ball is entered in the ball entering portion? You cannot receive the decision whether to grant or not. For this reason, it is not preferable for the player to use the shooting means even if he continues to operate the shooting means. However, in the gaming machine of this configuration, the second privilege is given when the number of balls entering the ball entering section reaches a specific number, so that the special information has reached the predetermined number, that is, the game ball is entering. Even in a situation in which the player cannot receive the first privilege whether or not to obtain the first privilege even if he/she enters the ball portion, it is significant to at least enter the ball portion. In other words, regardless of whether or not the special information has reached a predetermined number, the second benefit that increases the degree of expectation of privilege award by reaching the specific number and the ceiling that the specific number has been reached are related to each other. Since the player can expect to obtain at least one of the first benefit that can be expected to be granted each time, it is possible to improve the interest even if the special information reaches the predetermined number. it can.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the specific number is greater than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, the effect described in the feature C2 can be obtained due to the relationship between the predetermined number and the specific number.

Feature C4. The player is provided with a lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1004 and S1006 to S1008 by the main control device 71) for performing a lottery on whether or not to give the second privilege to the player,
The lottery means performs a lottery of whether or not to grant the second privilege when the number of balls entering the ball entering section reaches the specific number,
The second privilege granting means grants the second privilege to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to granting the second privilege. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3.

According to the above configuration, the second benefit is not uniformly given when the number of balls entered into the ball entering section reaches a specific number, but is given through lottery by the lottery means. As a result, the effect of the above feature C2 can be achieved without raising the ball launch rate too much.

Feature C5. A first state (guidance state) provided in the ball entering portion where a game ball can easily enter the ball entering portion, and a ball entering the ball entering portion is permitted, but the ball entering is more than the first state. A variable ball entering means (universal accessory 35d) that can be switched between a second state (non-induction state) where it is difficult to enter the ball
A variable ball control means for executing a switching control for temporarily changing the variable ball entrance means from the second state to the first state (a function for executing the universal figure/universal electric power control process by the main controller 71);
Equipped with
As the gaming state, a high-frequency state (high-frequency support mode) and a low-frequency state (low-frequency support mode) in which the frequency of the switching control by the variable ball entering means is relatively high and low are set,
State transition means (main control device) for transitioning the gaming state to either the high frequency state or the low frequency state, triggered by each of the benefits being given by the first benefit granting means or the second benefit granting means 71. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C2 to C4, which is provided with a function of executing the special electric power ending process by 71.

According to the above configuration, when either the first benefit or the second benefit is granted, the gaming state shifts to the high frequency state or the low frequency state. In the high-frequency state, it is easier to enter the ball entering portion, and thus it is easier to receive the award determination as to whether or not to obtain the first privilege than in the low-frequency state. Further, in the case of a high frequency state, it is possible to expect an increase in the number of balls entering the ball entrance section at the same time. That is, since it is easy for the number of balls entered in the ball entering portion to reach a specific number, it is easy to receive the second privilege. Thereby, a new game can be provided by using the configuration of the feature C4.

Specifically, for example, when the first benefit is given, the player is allowed to shift to the high-frequency state, and when the second benefit is given, the game is shifted to the low-frequency state. After obtaining, it becomes possible to easily reach the specific number of balls entering the ball entering portion and obtain the second privilege. On the other hand, since the game shifts to a low frequency state after obtaining the second privilege, it is better to receive the first privilege by receiving the grant determination by the determination means than to obtain the second privilege during the high frequency state. It is preferable for the person. Therefore, it is not preferable for the player to further enter the ball entering portion when the number of stored special information has reached the predetermined number in the high frequency state. However, for example, when the high frequency state is about to end due to some end condition (time or number of games) other than that each privilege is granted, as described above, the number of balls entered is the specific number in order to obtain the second privilege. It is preferable to reach Therefore, when the number of stored special information has reached a predetermined number, it is possible to create a case in which it is preferable for the player and a case in which it is not preferable for the player to enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the diversification of the game is achieved. Is possible.

Further, in the case of this configuration, if the first privilege is obtained at a timing when the number of entered balls is close to the specific number and shifts to the high frequency state, the second privilege is immediately given and the state shifts to the low frequency state, It is easy to receive the determination of whether or not to obtain the first benefit (it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion), and the low frequency state is shifted without receiving the benefit of the high frequency state. That is, it is easier for the player to benefit from the high-frequency state and it is preferable for the player to obtain the first privilege at a timing when the number of entered balls is far from the specific number. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the number of balls entered into the ball entrance section and the number of times of determination of award are displayed in a game machine or a game hall, a player who is aggressive in playing with a table whose number of balls entered is far from a specific number is actively used. It is assumed that a game is selected and played. Therefore, it is possible to actively play a game even with a machine far from a specific number, which is apt to be shunned in a gaming machine that can obtain a privilege when the number of entered balls reaches a specific number.

Further, for example, when the first benefit is given, the game is shifted to the low-frequency state, and when the second benefit is given, the game is shifted to the high-frequency state. As a player, the second benefit is obtained. After that, it becomes possible to easily reach the specific number, so that the second privilege can be obtained continuously. In this case, if the first privilege is obtained before the specific number is reached, the state shifts to a low-frequency state, so that the number of times the player is allowed to enter the ball entering portion should be as large as possible than the number of times of receiving the award determination. That is, the launching means is operated so that the special information is stored in a predetermined number, so as to further enter the ball entering portion. In addition, even if the player shifts to the low-frequency state by obtaining the first privilege, at least as described in the characteristic C2, if the number of balls entering the ball-in part reaches a predetermined number, the second Since the privilege can be obtained, the significance of entering the ball into the ball entering portion is maintained when the number of stored special information is a predetermined number.

In this way, it is possible to create a new game by using each privilege and each frequency state, and by providing these new games, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C6. In the high-frequency state, there is a number-limit high-frequency state (high-frequency support mode with a number-of-times limitation) in which the assignment determination is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times) that is determined in advance to shift to the low-frequency state. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, which is included.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the soundness of the game without raising the ball launch rate excessively as compared with the configuration in which, after one of the privileges is granted, the number of times of the determination of grant is unlimited and the state shifts to a high frequency state. it can.

Further, with this configuration, the following new games can be provided in relation to the specific number and the predetermined number of times.

That is, in the number-of-times limitation high-frequency state, if the number of balls entered into the ball-entering portion reaches a specific number before the number of times of the award determination reaches a predetermined number, the second privilege is given during the number-of-times limitation high-frequency state, Further, when the number of balls entered into the ball entrance section reaches a specific number after the number of times of determination of grant reaches a predetermined number, the second privilege is awarded after the number-of-times limitation high-frequency state is shifted to the low-frequency state. Then, as a player, in the number-of-times limitation high-frequency state, the determination of whether or not the first privilege can be obtained is received for a specified number of times, and after that, when the player shifts to the low-frequency state, the second privilege is obtained immediately. The number of balls to enter the ball is adjusted so that it is possible. By doing so, it is possible to provide a new game in which the operation of the firing means is adjusted in relation to the specific number and the predetermined number of times.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned game, the predetermined number of times may be set smaller than a specific number.

Feature C7. Second means for counting the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion in a situation where the number of special information stored by the acquired information storage means has reached the predetermined number (step S2710 by the main controller 71) And the function of executing the processing of step S2711),
In the number-of-times limitation high-frequency state, when the number of balls entered by the second means is the second specific number (156), which is a number smaller than the specific number, the second specific number is reached. A second notification executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S3206 and step S3207 by the sound and light control device 300) for executing notification of the effect,
The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the second specific number is set to be equal to or less than a number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of times from the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the second means counts the number of entered balls in the case where the awarding determination is not performed even if the game balls are inserted into the ball entering portion. In other words, the number of entered balls is a number that can reduce the number up to a specific number, although the awarding determination is not performed in the frequency-limited high-frequency state. Further, the number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of times from the specific number is the maximum value of the number that can be shortened. Since the second specific number notified by the second notification executing means is set to the maximum value or less, the player should understand that the number that can be shortened in the number-of-times limitation high frequency state is barely reached. Is possible. This makes it easier for the player to play the game described in Feature C6.

Feature C8. The state transition means transitions the game state to the low-frequency state of the high-frequency state and the low-frequency state with a predetermined probability, triggered by giving each of the benefits,
The first probability that the state shifting means shifts the game state to the low frequency state when the first privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means is the second probability by the second privilege granting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, which is set to be lower than a second probability of shifting the gaming state to the low-frequency state when a privilege is granted.

According to the above configuration, the probability of shifting to the low frequency state is higher when the second privilege is given than when the first privilege is given. In other words, if the second privilege is given when the number of balls entering the ball entrance portion reaches a specific number, it is easy to shift to a low frequency state in the subsequent game, and it is given when the ball enters the ball entrance portion. If the first privilege is awarded when the judgment is won, it is easy to shift to a high-frequency state in the subsequent games. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to play the game even on a table far from the specific number, without paying too much attention only to the fact that the number of balls entering the ball entering section reaches a specific number in the game machine.

Feature C9. The first special winning portion (first special winning opening 52) and the second special winning portion (second special winning portion) that allow the game ball to enter the game ball by entering the game ball. Mouth 253),
The game ball, which is provided in the ball passing area (game ball passing area R) through which the game ball entering the ball entering portion passes, and the game ball entering the ball entering portion is not entered into the second special ball entering portion. A first passage (first passage 51a) that is possible and can enter the first special ball entering portion; and a second special ball that cannot enter the first special ball entering portion Distribution means (distribution plate 54) for distributing to any one of the second passages (second passages 51b) capable of entering the ball,
Equipped with
The distribution means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on the arrival of the game ball entering the ball entering part, and the specific number of game balls enter the ball entering part. With this, the game ball is transferred to the first special ball entering section,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information based on a ball entering the second special ball entering section,
Any of the features C2 to C8, wherein the second privilege granting means is in a state in which the second privilege can be granted based on a ball entering the first special ball entering part. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, the game balls that enter the ball entering section are distributed to the second special ball entering section before the number of entered balls reaches a specific number, and the first special when the number reaches a specific number. It is distributed to the entrance section. Then, the special information is acquired based on the entry into the second special entry portion, and the determination of the grant is made. Further, the second privilege is awarded based on the entry into the first special entry portion. With such a configuration, the second privilege increases the degree of expectation of privilege award by reaching the specific number, and if the number is less than the predetermined number, the privilege is granted every time the player enters the ball regardless of the specific number. The first privilege that can be expected can be realized by using a mechanical operation such as distribution by the distribution unit.

Feature C10. The distribution means distributes the game balls flowing down from the upstream side in the ball passage area alternately on the first passage side and the second passage side, respectively, n (n≧2) distribution members ( For example, having eight distribution plates 54),
The n distribution members are respectively arranged so that when the game balls are distributed to the first passage side by the distribution member in the former stage, the game balls reach the distribution member in the latter stage. ,
When the number of game balls in the ball entering portion reaches the specific number, the distribution destinations of the game balls for the n distribution members are all on the first passage side, and the game balls are the first special ball entering portion. The game machine according to feature C9, wherein the game machine is adapted to enter a state of entering the ball.

According to the above configuration, n distribution members are provided from the upstream side to the downstream side in the ball passing area, and when the distribution destination of the distribution member of the preceding stage is the first passage side, the distribution member of the subsequent stage is provided. A game ball can be reached. Then, as the distribution destination of each distribution member is changed in accordance with the game ball entering the ball entering portion, when the distribution destination for all the distribution members is the first passage side, the game ball enters the first special entrance portion. Make a ball. In this case, the distribution member of each stage changes the distribution destination alternately between the first passage side and the second passage side each time the game ball arrives. Therefore, in order to change the number of game balls (that is, the number of balls required to enter the first special entrance portion) required to set the distribution destinations of the respective distribution members to the first passage side, the distribution member is to be changed. It suffices to change the number of installations (i.e., "n"), and it is possible to easily carry out a design change relating to the entry into the first special entry portion. For example, in the gaming machine, in order to make it difficult to obtain the second privilege (reduce the chance of entering the first special ball entering portion), the number of distribution members installed (the number of installation steps) is increased and the second benefit is acquired. In order to make it easier (increase the chance of entering the first special entrance portion), the number of distribution members installed (the number of installation steps) may be reduced.

When the switching between the two states is performed alternately by each sorting member, the game ball that has entered the ball entering section enters the first special ball entering section once every 2nth ball entering. Becomes In other words, the n-th power of 2 is the upper limit number (ceiling), and when the upper limit number is reached, the game ball enters the first special entrance portion. If n=8, the ceiling is 2 8 =256.

Feature C11. Each of the distribution members is an oscillating body that is pivotally supported in the sphere passing area and swings when the game sphere hits when the game sphere passes to switch the distribution destination of the game sphere. The gaming machine according to feature C10, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball hits each distribution member, the distribution destination is switched by the mechanical rocking operation of each distribution member. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution member is not determined by electrical processing, the calculation processing for switching the distribution destination is unnecessary, and power consumption does not occur at the time of distribution. In addition, since it is not affected by an electrical signal, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an unauthorized electrical signal.

Feature C12. Drive means that is driven so that the distribution destination of the distribution means is either the first passage side or the second passage side;
Control means for determining a distribution destination of the distribution means, and driving the drive means based on the result,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C9 to C11, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the distribution destination of the distribution unit can be switched by control. As a result, it is possible to diversify game contents (specifications) and game effects. For example, it is advisable to change the specific number (the number of incoming balls required to enter the game ball into the first special incoming ball portion) between the normal state and the highly accurate state.

Further, in the configuration having a plurality of distribution members (distribution plate 54) as the distribution means like the feature C10, it is preferable that the distribution members are driven independently. In this case, for any of the distribution members, the distribution destination can be fixed to the first passage side or the second passage side by the drive of the driving means, whereby a specific number (the game ball is It is possible to change the number of balls required to enter the special ball entry part) to either the increase side or the decrease side.

For example, when the distribution destination of five distribution members of the eight distribution members (distribution plate 54) is fixed to the first passage side and the remaining three distribution members are not fixed, the ball entering portion When the number of entered balls of the game ball in “8 (=2 to the third power)” is reached, the game ball enters the first special entrance part. That is, it is possible to enter the game balls into the first special ball entering section once every eight passages.

<Feature D group>
It should be noted that the following characteristic D group is, "As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered a ball-in portion provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device. It is known that the variable display is displayed, and when the winning result is obtained in the lottery, the combination of the specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the special game state advantageous to the player is entered. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175.) When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the ball enters the ball entrance device. A large amount of game balls are paid out based on the game balls entered in the above-mentioned ball entry section. Therefore, the expected number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who has continued playing a game for a long time is the same as the expected number of game balls that can be obtained by a player who finishes the game in a short period of time, and the player is reluctant to continue playing. There is a concern that it will become "."

Feature D1. A ball passing portion (ball passing port 33a) through which a game ball that is launched by the launching means (launch operating device 28) and flows down the game area can pass.
A special winning portion (special winning opening 52) that allows the game ball to win by passing through the ball passing portion.
The game balls, which are provided in a ball passage area (game ball passage area R) where the game balls can pass from the ball passage portion to the special prize portion, and which have passed through the ball passage portion, are awarded to the special prize portion. A distribution means (distribution plate 54) for distributing to either a possible first passage (first passage 51a) or a second passage (second passage 51b) in which the special winning portion cannot be won;
Equipped with
The distribution means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on the arrival of the game ball that has passed through the ball passing portion, and the game ball of a predetermined number passes through the ball passing portion. A game machine characterized in that it shifts to a state in which a game ball is won in a special winning portion.

According to the characteristic D1, when the game ball flows down the game area in accordance with the shooting operation by the player, the game ball passes through a predetermined ball passing portion, so that the game ball can be won in the special winning portion. Become. In this case, in the ball passage area from the ball passage portion to the special prize portion, the game balls that have passed through the ball passage portion are provided with a first passage (a passage in which the special prize portion can be won) and a second passage (in the special prize portion). Since there is a sorting means for allocating to either of the (non-winning passages), not all of the game balls pass to the special winning part just because the game balls pass through the ball passing part. The special winning portion is won only when it is distributed to the first passage side by the distribution means.

In particular, the distribution means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on the arrival of the game ball that has passed through the ball passing portion, and the special prize is awarded as the predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passing portion. It is supposed to shift to a state where game balls are awarded to the club. That is, in order to win the game balls in the special winning portion and obtain a predetermined privilege, it is a condition that a predetermined number of game balls are passed in the ball passing portion. In this case, it is considered that the player who plays the present gaming machine actively continues the game, expecting that a certain number of game balls will be obtained by passing a predetermined number of game balls in the ball passing portion. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

Feature D2. The distribution means distributes the game balls flowing down from the upstream side in the ball passage area alternately on the first passage side and the second passage side, respectively, n (n≧2) distribution members ( For example, having eight distribution plates 54),
The n distribution members are respectively arranged so that when the game balls are distributed to the first passage side by the distribution member in the former stage, the game balls reach the distribution member in the latter stage. ,
When the number of passing game balls in the ball passing portion reaches the predetermined number, the distribution destinations of the game balls for the n distribution members are all on the first passage side, and the game balls are won in the special winning portion. The game machine described in the feature D1 is characterized in that the game machine is switched to.

According to the above configuration, n distribution members are provided from the upstream side to the downstream side in the ball passing area, and when the distribution destination of the distribution member of the preceding stage is the first passage side, the distribution member of the subsequent stage is provided. A game ball can be reached. Then, as the distribution destination of each distribution member changes with the passage of the game ball in the ball passage portion, and when the distribution destination for all the distribution members becomes the first passage side, the game ball wins the special winning portion. In this case, the distribution member of each stage changes the distribution destination alternately between the first passage side and the second passage side each time the game ball arrives. Therefore, in order to change the number of game balls (that is, the number of balls required for winning the special winning portion) required for all the distribution members to be distributed to the first passage side, the number of distribution members installed ( That is, it is only necessary to change “n”), and it is possible to easily carry out a design change related to winning in the special winning portion. For example, in a gaming machine, the number of distribution members installed (the number of installation steps) is increased to make it harder to acquire a privilege (reduce the chance of winning a prize in the special prize section), and to make it easier to acquire a privilege (to the special prize section). In order to increase the number of winning opportunities), it is advisable to reduce the number of distribution members installed (the number of installation steps).

When the two switching states are alternately switched by each sorting member, the game ball that has passed through the ball passing portion will be won in the special winning portion only once every 2 nth ball passing. In other words, the n-th power of 2 becomes the upper limit number (ceiling), and when the upper limit number is reached, the game ball wins the special winning part. If n=8, the ceiling is 2 8 =256.

Feature D3. Each of the distribution members is an oscillating body that is pivotally supported in the sphere passing area and swings when the game sphere hits when the game sphere passes to switch the distribution destination of the game sphere. The gaming machine described in the feature D2, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball hits each distribution member, the distribution destination is switched by the mechanical rocking operation of each distribution member. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution member is not determined by electrical processing, the calculation processing for switching the distribution destination is unnecessary, and power consumption does not occur at the time of distribution. In addition, since it is not affected by an electrical signal, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an unauthorized electrical signal.

Feature D4. A general winning part (general winning part 53) is provided in addition to the special winning part, as a winning part that allows a game ball to pass through the ball passing part.
The special winning portion (special winning opening 52) is a first lottery opportunity winning portion in which a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a bonus is given to a player when a game ball is won.
The general winning part is a winning part in which the lottery process is not executed even if a game ball wins,
The distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special winning part or the general winning part based on arrival of the game ball passing through the ball passing part. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the ball passing portion, a prize is awarded to one of the special prize portion and the general prize portion, and the payout of the game ball can be expected in accordance with the prize. In other words, for the player, some advantage is brought about by the game ball passing through the ball passing portion. Partly because of this, the player is encouraged to operate the launching means aiming at the passage of the game ball in the ball passing portion, and as a result, the number of balls passing through the ball passing portion increases and the special winning portion is entered. The chances of winning the prize will increase.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the winning probability of the lottery process performed when a game ball is won in the special winning portion is 50% or more.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability at the time of winning the special winning portion (first lottery opportunity winning portion) is 50% or more, with the passage of a predetermined number of game balls in the ball passing portion, A player can get a privilege with a high probability. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game.

The winning probability of the lottery process may be 80% or more, or may be almost 100%.

Feature D6. In the game area, in addition to the special winning portion as the first lottery opportunity winning portion, a second lottery opportunity winning portion (operating port 34) is provided in which the lottery processing is executed in association with the winning of a game ball. The gaming machine described in the feature D4 or D5.

According to the above configuration, even before a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the ball passage portion (ball passage opening 33a), that is, before the game balls have won the first lottery opportunity prize portion (special prize portion). However, since the lottery process is carried out by the game balls winning in the second lottery opportunity winning part, which is different from the first lottery opportunity winning part, the player who is playing the game has another chance to win. Can be given. For example, immediately after the number of balls passing to the ball passing portion reaches a predetermined number and the lottery process is performed, there is a time lag before the next lottery process, which discourages the player's motivation to continue playing. However, if the configuration is such that the lottery process is executed by winning the second lottery opportunity winning part as described above, it is possible to keep the expectation of winning at any time and continue the game to the player. Can be encouraged.

Feature D7. A second ball passing portion (through gate 35A) through which a game ball can pass is provided on the upstream side of the first ball passing portion (ball passing port 33a) as the ball passing portion in the game area, and the game ball is Provided that the game ball passes through the second ball passing portion, the game ball can pass through the first ball passing portion,
Whether the player is given the first privilege (game privilege in the opening/closing execution mode) based on that the game ball passes through the first ball passing portion and wins the special winning portion (special winning opening 52) A lottery means for lottery whether or not to give a second privilege (game privilege in the support execution mode) to the player based on that the game ball passes through the second ball passage portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, which is provided with (the MPU 82 of the main control device 71).

According to the above configuration, when the player shoots a game ball aiming at the first ball passing portion, it also aims at the second ball passing portion at the same time. In this case, if the game ball passes through the second ball passing portion, the lottery process for the second benefit is performed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the first ball passing part following the second ball passing part, if the number of ball passing in the first ball passing part reaches a predetermined number, the game ball is won in the special winning part. Then, the lottery process for the second benefit is performed. Here, for the player, the passage of the game ball through each of the above-mentioned passing portions increases the opportunity to obtain the first privilege as well as the second privilege, which increases the desire to continue the game.

Feature D8. A game machine that determines effect contents based on a lottery result by the lottery means, and performs an effect by an effect device (symbol display device 42) based on the effect contents,
A first effect that is determined based on the lottery result of the first privilege at the time of winning the special prize portion, and a lottery result of the second privilege when the game ball is passed to the second ball passing portion. The game machine according to Feature D7, wherein any of the second effects described above is performed by the effect device.

According to the above configuration, the first effect according to the lottery result of the first benefit and the second effect according to the result of the lottery of the second benefit are respectively executed by the same effect device. In this case, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the effect is for the first benefit or the second benefit while the effect is being performed by the effect device. Therefore, when performing the effect of the effect device, the player can be interested in whether each effect is the first effect or the second effect, and can increase the interest in the effect. If the winning of the special winning portion is not directly visible to the player, the effect this time is based on the winning of the special winning portion (special winning opening 52) or the second ball passing portion (through gate). It is not possible to discriminate whether or not it is due to the ball passing of 35A), and it is possible to further raise the degree of attention of the player regarding the privilege grant.

It is preferable that the first effect and the second effect include the same effect form. For example, when a variation symbol is changed in the symbol display device as the effect device, the same variable symbol is changed in both the first effect and the second effect, and only the final confirmed symbol is changed to the first symbol. Design for production, design for second production.

It should be noted that the expected number of prize balls for the first benefit is preferably set to be larger than that for the second benefit. In this case, the player plays the game with the expectation that the first privilege with a large expected number of prize balls will be generated, but the first privilege and the first privilege from the distribution device which is not visible in the rendering device. It is no longer possible to recognize which presentation process of the two benefits is currently being executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the lottery result by making the player expect the first benefit to occur.

Feature D9. A cover member (cover member 60) for covering the distribution means from the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the cover member makes the sorting means invisible to the player.

According to the above structure, the distribution member cannot be viewed from the front of the gaming machine by the cover member. As a result, whether the distribution destination of the distribution means is the first passage (the passage where the special winning portion can be won) or the second passage (the passage where the special winning portion cannot be won) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp. Further, although the player cannot visually recognize the sorting means, it is possible to recognize the presence of the sorting means by the cover member provided in the game area, and the distribution of the game balls is performed. It is possible to increase the player's attention.

Feature D10. In the process of the number of passing game balls passing through the ball passing portion approaching the predetermined number, when the number of passing game balls reaches a predetermined intermediate number smaller than the predetermined number, the intermediate number is The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized by further comprising a notification executing means (a function of executing steps S408 and S409) for executing a notification process of notifying a player of arrival.

According to the above configuration, the number of balls passing through the ball passing portion gradually increases, and the number of passing balls is a predetermined intermediate number that is smaller than a predetermined number (the number of balls that allow game balls to be won in the special winning portion). When is reached, the player is informed that the intermediate number has been reached. As a result, the player can understand to some extent how much the game ball will win in the special winning part in the future, and the expectation for the winning can be increased. This also makes it possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

Feature D11. Drive means that is driven so that the distribution destination of the distribution means is either the first passage side or the second passage side;
Control means for determining a distribution destination of the distribution means, and driving the drive means based on the result,
The gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D10.

According to the above configuration, the distribution destination of the distribution unit can be switched by control. As a result, it is possible to diversify game contents (specifications) and game effects. For example, it is advisable to change the predetermined number (the number of passing balls required to cause the special winning portion to win the game ball) between the normal state and the highly accurate state.

Further, in the configuration having the plurality of distribution members (the distribution plate 54) as the distribution means as in the feature D2, it is preferable that the distribution members are independently driven. In this case, for any one of the sorting members, the sorting destination can be fixed to the first passage side or the second passage side by driving the driving means, whereby a predetermined number (game balls are specially won) It is possible to change the number of passing balls required to win a prize) to either increase or decrease.

For example, when the distribution destinations of five distribution members of the eight distribution members (distribution plate 54) are fixed to the first passage side and the remaining three distribution members are not fixed, the ball passage portion When the number of passing game balls in "8" (=2 to the third power) is reached, the game ball will be won in the special winning portion. That is, the game balls can be won in the special winning portion once every eight passages.

<Feature E group>
In addition, the following characteristic E group, "as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the transition lottery to the special game state such as hit At the same time, the display screen of the display device displays the variation of the design, and when the winning result is obtained in the lottery, the combination of the specific design is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, which is advantageous for the player. There is known a configuration for shifting to a special game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Here, in a pachinko machine or the like, it is required to increase the degree of attention to the game, and from this viewpoint. There is still room for improvement."

Feature E1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition (the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 52 or the working opening 34), the first notification operation (the symbol display device 42) causes the first game diverting operation ( Special game sub-variation) is started, and the first game time execution means (the function of executing the special map special electric control process by the main control device 71, which ends the first game reproduction operation as a predetermined stop result, the sound and light control device) The function of executing the effect determination process by 300),
Based on the fact that a predetermined second condition (winning of the game ball into the through gate 35A) is established, the predetermined game means or a notification means other than the predetermined notification means is used for the second game diverting operation (general figure sub). The second game time execution means (the function of executing the general/universal/universal electric power control process by the main control device 71, the sound/light control device 300, which starts the fluctuation) and ends the second game time operation as a predetermined stop result Function to execute the performance determination process),
Equipped with
The first game time execution means determines the operation continuation period (variable display time) of the first game time operation according to the operation status of the second game time operation by the second game time execution means. Means (function of executing processes of steps S2005 and S2008 by main controller 71 in the second embodiment, function of executing processes of steps S2503 to S2507 and step S2510 by main controller 71 in the third embodiment) ) Is provided with a gaming machine.

According to the feature E1, in the gaming machine in which a plurality of game reusing operations are performed, the operation continuation period of one game reusing operation (first game revolving operation) is set to the other game reusing operation (second game revolving operation) Since it is determined according to the operation status of (operation), it becomes possible to give a relevance to these game diverting operations. Specifically, for example, one of the game diversion operations is ended after the other game diversion operation is completed after the other game diversion operation, or is ended at the same time. It is possible to diversify the production. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature E2. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game turning operation is being executed, a grasping unit that grasps the remaining operation continuation period of the second game returning operation being executed (second implementation) A function of executing the process of step S2005 by the main control device 71 in the embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S2503 to step S2507 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment).
When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game re-use operation is being executed, the determining means grasps the operation continuation period of the first game re-use operation accompanying the satisfaction of the first condition. Means to determine as the remaining operation continuation period of the second game use operation grasped by the means (function to execute the process of step S2008 by the main control device 71 in the second embodiment, the main control in the third embodiment The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is provided with the function of executing the process of step S2510 by the device 71.

According to the above configuration, if the second game use operation is executed at the timing when the first condition is satisfied, the first game use operation associated with the establishment of the first condition is used for the second game use that is being executed. It can be ended at the same timing as the operation, or it can be ended at the timing when the second game playing operation in execution is scheduled to end. As a result, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of game diversion operations having different execution conditions are performed, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the gaming state is changed or a privilege is given after the game diversion operation is finished, which game time is used? It becomes difficult to understand whether the game state is changed or the privilege is given based on the use operation (which condition is satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to make the results of each of the plurality of game diversion operations difficult to understand, and to diversify the effect.

Feature E3. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game turning operation is being executed, a grasping unit that grasps the remaining operation continuation period of the second game returning operation being executed (second implementation) A function of executing the processes of step S3212, step S3213 and step S3216 by the main control device 71 in the modified example of the embodiment,
When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game turning operation is being executed, the determining means preliminarily sets the remaining operation continuation period of the second game turning operation which is grasped by the grasping means. When the period is shorter than the predetermined period, a means for determining the operation continuation period of the first game turning action associated with the establishment of the first condition as a predetermined period (variable display time corresponding to the support mode) ( The game machine described in the feature E1 or the feature E2, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S33302 and S3307 by the main control device 71 in the modification of the second embodiment.

According to the above configuration, even if the second game turning operation is executed at the timing when the first condition is satisfied, the remaining operation continuation period of the second game turning operation is shorter than a predetermined period. In the first operation operation for the first game, the remaining operation operation period is not set as the operation operation period for the first game operation, and the operation operation period for the first game operation is set as a predetermined period. Is executed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience that the period during which the first game re-use operation is performed is too short and it becomes difficult for the player to confirm the first game re-use operation.

Feature E4. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game turning operation is being executed, a grasping unit that grasps the remaining operation continuation period of the second game returning operation being executed (second implementation) A function of executing the processes of steps S3405 and S3406 by main controller 71 in the modified example of the embodiment),
When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game turning operation is being executed, the determining means preliminarily sets the remaining operation continuation period of the second game turning operation which is grasped by the grasping means. When it is longer than the predetermined period, a means for determining the operation continuation period of the first game turning action accompanying the establishment of the first condition as a predetermined period (variable display time corresponding to the support mode) ( The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S3307 by the main control device 71 in the modified example of the second embodiment.

According to the above configuration, even if the second game turning operation is executed at the timing when the first condition is satisfied, the remaining operation continuation period of the second game turning operation is longer than a predetermined period. In, the operation continuation period of the first game turning operation is not set as the remaining operation continuation period, and the operation continuing period of this first game turning operation is set as a predetermined predetermined period, and the first game turning operation is performed. Is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a phenomenon in which the period for performing the first game turning operation is too long and the first game turning operation is continued endlessly.

Feature E5. If the second game revolving operation is not performed when the first condition is satisfied, the determining unit causes a predetermined predetermined period (variable display time corresponding to the support mode) to be satisfied when the first condition is satisfied. Means for determining the operation continuation period of the first game reusing operation (function of executing the processes of step S2002, step S2006 and step S2008 by the main controller 71 in the second embodiment, the main control in the third embodiment) The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of step S2502, step S2508, and step S2510 by the device 71.

According to the above configuration, the second game turning operation is not performed when the first condition is satisfied, the operation continuation period of the first game turning operation is not determined, and the first game turning operation is not performed, It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Feature E6. An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the satisfaction of the second condition (a function that executes a process of acquiring reserved information on the universal figure side in the third embodiment);
Acquired information storage means (universal figure holding area 206) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number that is predetermined as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit,
Equipped with
The second game time execution means executes the second game time operation in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The deciding means decides, according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the first condition is satisfied, an operation continuation period of the first game turning operation associated with the satisfaction of the first condition. The special determination means (function of executing the processing of steps S2503 to S2507 and step S2510 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment) is provided, and any one of features E1 to E5 is described. Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, when there is special information for performing the second game turning operation, the operation duration of the first game turning operation is determined in consideration of the special information. As a result, not only the second game use operation executed when the first condition is satisfied, but also the second game use operation corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the first condition is satisfied, It is possible to associate with the first game diversion operation. Therefore, the range of selections for producing the association is expanded, and the game can be diversified.

Feature E7. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game playing operation is being executed, a grasping unit that grasps the remaining operation continuation period of the second game playing operation being executed (third implementation) The function of executing the processes of steps S2503 to S2507 by the main control device 71 in the embodiment,
The special deciding means, when the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game turning operation is being executed, the remaining operation continuation period of the second game turning operation grasped by the grasping means. On the other hand, the period for which the operation continuation period of the operation for the second game corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is added, is used for the first game when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E6, which is provided with a unit (a function of executing the process of step S2510 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment) that is determined as the operation continuation period of the operation.

According to the above configuration, the second game turn operation executed when the first condition is satisfied and the timing at which the second game turn operation corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means ends, and the first game. It is possible to match the timing with which the diversion operation ends. As a result, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of game revolving operations are performed, for example, when the game state is changed or a privilege is given after the end of the game revolving operation, which game revolving operation (which one It becomes difficult to know whether the game state has changed or the privilege has been given based on the condition being satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to make the results of each of the plurality of game diversion operations difficult to understand, and to diversify the effect.

Feature E8. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game playing operation is being executed, a grasping unit that grasps the remaining operation continuation period of the second game playing operation being executed (third implementation) The function of executing the processing of steps S2503 to S2507 by the main control device 71 in the embodiment),
Selecting means for selecting one piece of special information from the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (function for executing the processing of 2505 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment);
Equipped with
The special deciding means, when the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game turning operation is being executed, the remaining operation continuation period of the second game turning operation grasped by the grasping means. In contrast, in the operation continuation period of the second game turning operation corresponding to the special information selected by the selecting means, and the second game turning operation executed before the selected special information. Means for determining a period obtained by adding the action corresponding period of the corresponding special information as the action continuation period of the first game playing action associated with the satisfaction of the first condition (by the main controller 71 in the third embodiment) The gaming machine described in the characteristic E6 or the characteristic E7, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of steps S2506 to S2507 and step S2509.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a plurality of special information is stored, the timing at which the second game diverting operation of the one special information selected by the selecting means ends and the timing at which the first game diverting operation ends , Can be matched. As a result, in the gaming machine with the feature E7, the range of effect selection is widened, and the diversification of the game is achieved.

Feature E9. It is provided with a first ball entering portion (special winning opening 52 and actuation opening 34) and a second ball entering portion (through gates 35A, 35B) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion,
The second condition is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion,
The first ball entering portion is provided at a position where a game ball entering the second ball entering portion can enter in the game area, according to any one of features E1 to E8. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the game ball flowing down the game area may enter the second ball entering portion, and the game ball may further enter the first ball entering portion. Therefore, if the first condition is further satisfied after the second condition is satisfied, the first game reproducing operation is started after the second game reproducing operation is started. As described in the characteristic E1, the operation continuation period of the first game revolving operation is determined according to the operating condition of the second game revolving operation, so if this configuration is adopted for this characteristic E1, the second ball entry portion According to the length of the flow path of the game ball from to the first ball entering portion, it is possible to change the operation continuation period of the first game diversion operation. As a result, it is possible to design an effect by associating the operation continuation period of a plurality of game diversion operations with the flow path of the game ball, which broadens the range of effect design and improves the attention level of the game. it can.

Feature E10. The game balls that enter the second ball-entering portion are provided in a ball-passing area (game ball-passing area R) where the game balls can pass from the second ball-in portion to the first ball-in portion. , A distribution means for allocating to either a first passage (first passage 51a) for entering the first entrance portion or a second passage (second passage 51b) for not entering the first entrance portion (Distribution plate 54),
Grasping means (steps S1710 to S1714 by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments) for recognizing which of the first passage and the second passage the game balls are to be distributed to. Or a function of executing the processing of steps S2311 to S2314),
A gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change by the allocating means whether or not the game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion is allowed to enter the first ball entering portion, and the grasping means grasps it. be able to. That is, when the second condition is satisfied, that is, when the second game turning operation is started, it is possible to grasp whether or not the first condition is then met and the first game turning operation is performed. .. As a result, in the configuration in which the operation continuation period of the first game turning action is determined according to the operation status of the second game turning action, the operation continuation period of the second game turning action is set in advance (first game turning action). It is possible to make adjustments before the operation duration is determined. Therefore, it is possible to preferably carry out the first game turning operation and the second game turning operation.

Feature E11. On the basis of the satisfaction of the first condition, a transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player (special figure variation start processing by the main controller 71 is performed. Function to execute)
Based on that the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determining means is a transition corresponding result corresponding to the transition of the game state to the special game state, the game state after the end of the first game diversion operation. A game state transition means for transitioning to the special game state (a function for executing the special figure fixing process by the main control device 71),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first condition is satisfied, a transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the special game state. After the end of, shift to the special game state. Then, since the operation continuation period of the first game turning operation is determined according to the operation status of the second game turning operation, the transition timing to the special game state based on the establishment of the first condition is the second game turning operation. It will be determined according to the operation status of the operation. This makes it possible to associate the operation status of the second game re-use operation with the point of interest to the player that the special game state is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the operation status of the second game diversion operation.

Feature E12. Both the first game turning operation and the second game turning operation are performed by the predetermined notification means,
The first game time execution means ends the first game time operation as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means,
On the basis of the fact that the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second game turning operation is being performed, the second game turning operation being executed by the notification means is referred to as the first game turning operation. The gaming machine according to feature E11, which is provided with replacement means (a function of performing the process of step S2113 by the sound and light control device 300 in the second embodiment) for replacement.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of game revolving operations are performed, each game revolving operation is performed not by separate notifying means but by common notifying means. The operation may overlap. In particular, the first game reusing operation reflects the determination of the shift to the special game state, and therefore has a great effect on the profit for the player. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second game turning operation is being performed, the second game turning operation being executed by the replacing means is set to the first game turning operation, It is possible to promptly inform the player of information relating to the profit.

Feature E13. On the basis of the satisfaction of the first condition, a transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player (special figure variation start processing by the main controller 71 is performed. Function to execute)
Based on that the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determining means is a transition corresponding result corresponding to the transition of the game state to the special game state, the game state after the end of the first game diversion operation. A game state transition means for transitioning to the special game state (a function for executing the special figure fixing process by the main control device 71),
Equipped with
Both the first game turning operation and the second game turning operation are performed by the predetermined notification means,
The first game time execution means ends the first game time operation as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means,
Based on the satisfaction of the second condition, a comprehension means for comprehending whether or not the first condition is subsequently satisfied (steps S1710 to S1714 and step S2311 by the main controller 71 in the second and third embodiments). Function for executing the processing of step S2314),
The second game time execution means responds to the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means when it is determined by the grasping means that the first condition is subsequently satisfied based on the satisfaction of the second condition. Means for executing the second game diversion operation associated with the establishment of the second condition so as to obtain the stop result (the function of executing the processing of step S1812 or step S2413 by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments). ) The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of game revolving operations are performed, each game revolving operation is performed not by separate notifying means but by common notifying means, so each game revolving operation is performed. The operation may overlap. In particular, the first game reusing operation reflects the determination of the shift to the special game state, and therefore has a great effect on the profit for the player. Therefore, if the grasping unit subsequently grasps that the first condition is satisfied, the transition determination is not made at the time when the grasping unit grasps (the time when the second condition is satisfied), but the final decision is made. In addition, the second game diversion operation corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination accompanying the establishment of the first condition is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to promptly notify information relating to the profit of the player.

Feature E14. The stop result of the second game turning operation executed by the second game time executing means is a stop result when the determination result of the transfer determination by the transfer determining means is the transfer corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature E13.

According to the above configuration, the second game time executing means executes the second game time operation so that the transition correspondence result is the stop result. In this case, although there is a possibility that the result of the transition determination performed by the subsequent transition determination means will not be the transition response result, the player expects that it is the transition response result, and pays attention to such game reusing operation. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature E15. The gaming machine according to feature E14, wherein a probability of winning the transition determination by the transition determination means is 50% or more.

According to the above configuration, 50% or more of the transition determination results in the transition response result. Therefore, when the second game time executing means executes the second game time operation, the transition is performed regardless of the transition determination of the transition response result. Even if the second game diversion operation is started so that the correspondence result becomes the stop result, it is possible to reduce the number of events that do not result in the transition correspondence result after that. As a result, the stop result of the second game diversion operation corresponds to the transition correspondence result, but the determination result of the transition determination means does not actually shift to the special game state unlike the transition correspondence result. Events can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce confusion and discouragement given to the player.

The higher the winning probability of the transfer determination, the better, and more preferably 100%.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

10... Pachinko machine, 24... Game board, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 28... Launching operation device, 32... Special electric prize winning device, 32a... Large winning hole, 33... Special character, 33a... Ball passing port, 35A... Through Gate, 35c... Detecting sensor, 35d... General electric utility product, 42... Symbol display device, 42a... Display screen, 51a... First passage, 51b... Second passage, 54... Distribution plate, 55... Rotating shaft, 56 ... taper part, 60... cover member, 81... main control board, 82... MPU, 102... special figure holding area, 106... public figure holding area, 107... execution area, 204... second special figure holding area, 206... ordinary Figure holding area, 224... Game board, 253... Second special winning opening, 300... Sound/light control device, 302... MPU, 400... Display control device, 402... MPU, A... Real win result, B... Real win result, PE: Game area.

Claims (1)

Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area when operated by the player,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball that is launched by the launching means and flows down a game area can enter.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a game ball enters the ball entering portion,
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number set in advance as an upper limit,
For each of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, it is sequentially determined whether or not it is a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting the first privilege to the player, and the determination result is the grant corresponding. A privilege granting means for granting the first privilege when the result is obtained,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first process can be executed when the number of game balls entering the ball entering part is the first number, and the first process when the second number is larger than the first number. Is a configuration capable of executing different second processing,
By operating the launching means in a specific mode in which it is possible to enter the ball entering portion regardless of the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the first privilege different from the first privilege can be obtained. 2 means capable of executing a first notification that the situation is such that a privilege can be granted,
When a ball is thrown into the ball entering portion due to the operation of the firing means in the specific mode, it is more likely that the operation does not continue than the case where the operation of the firing means in the specific mode is continued. Means for executing a second notification that the situation may be advantageous;
Equipped with
A gaming machine, wherein the first notification and the second notification are executed by a common notification means.

Images